volume 2 – technical specifications bid no. 2017-168...

Vendor Name: _____________________

TARRANT COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT JACK BEACHAM, C.P.M., A.P.P. ROB COX, C.P.M., A.P.P. PURCHASING AGENT ASSISTANT PURCHASING AGENT

VOLUME 2 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

BID NO. 2017-168

MEDICAL EXAMINER’S OFFICE TEACHING MORGUE REMODEL

BIDS DUE AUGUST 14, 2017 2:00 P.M.

Technical Specifications Prepared by Hahnfeld Hoffer Stanford

200 Bailey Avenue, Suite 200 Fort Worth, Texas 76107

RFB NO. 2017-168

15017-00 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

TARRANT COUNTY

MEDICAL EXAMINER’S OFFICE

TEACHING MORGUE REMODEL

200 FELIKS GWOZDZ PLACE

FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76104

VOLUME II OF II

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

(REFER TO VOLUME I OF II FOR PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS)

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK

01 23 00 ALTERNATES

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

01 26 00 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01 26 10 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION

01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01 33 00 SUBMITTALS

01 42 00 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

01 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

01 60 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

01 73 00 EXECUTION

01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01 90 00 GENERAL ALTERATIONS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 24 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY


DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 84 13 FIRESTOPPING

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09 30 00 TILE

09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 91 13 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 35 53.13 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING WORK

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK

23 05 12 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

23 05 93 MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

23 73 13 AIR HANDLING UNITS


DIVISIONS 24 and 25 - Not used.

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

26 05 11 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

26 05 12 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

26 05 19 WIRES AND CABLES

26 05 20 WIRE CONNECTION AND DEVICES

26 05 26 GROUNDING

26 05 27 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS

26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES

26 05 32 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

26 05 33 CONDUITS

26 05 34 OUTLET BOXES

26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

26 28 16 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

26 28 17 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

26 29 13 MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS

26 51 13 LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISIONS 29 and 30 - Not used.

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

(NONE THIS PROJECT)

DIVISION 33 through 48 - Not used.

- END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS -

15017-00 01 11 00 - 1

SECTION 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The work covered by the Contract Documents is entitled "Tarrant County Medical

Examiner’s Office, Teaching Morgue Remodel, 200 Feliks Gwozdz Place, Fort Worth,

Texas 76104", as prepared by Hahnfeld Hoffer Stanford, dated February 17, 2017.

B. The project site is located at 200 Feliks Gwozdz, Fort Worth, Texas 76107. Reference

the vicinity map on the drawings.

C. The project consists of the renovation of an approximately 580 square foot training

morgue. Scope of work includes, but is not limited to, removal and replacement of

the existing ceiling, removal of a skylight (including patching of the roof opening),

replacement of rooftop mechanical units, removal of tiered seating and tier platforms

and steps, removal and replacement of tile flooring, removal and replacement of

limited areas of structural glazed wall tile, installation of new concrete pedestals under

stainless steel lab casework, installation of new stainless steel lab casework,

installation of a new autopsy station (including in-wall structural floor to roof structure

supports), installation of a new body/eye wash station, installation of new autopsy

exam lighting (including track lights and two extending-arm exam light and their

related structural supports), and installation of new exhaust ductwork related to the

new autopsy station. Scope also includes replacement of exam lights in an adjacent

autopsy suite with track lights.

D. NOTE: ALL BIDDERS ARE TO REVIEW ALL BID DOCUMENTS TO INSURE THEIR

PROPOSAL INCLUDES ALL REQUIRED MATERIALS AND SERVICES.

1.3 PROJECT NAME IDENTIFICATION / DEFINITIONS

A. Project Name: The term “Project Name” as used in the Contract Documents refers to

“Tarrant County Medical Examiner’s Office, Teaching Morgue Remodel, 200 Feliks

Gwozdz Place, Fort Worth, Texas 76104”.

B. Owner: The term “Owner” as used in the Contract Documents refers to State of

Texas, County of Tarrant, 100 Weatherford Street, Suite 460B, Fort Worth, Texas

76196.

C. Architect: The term “Architect” as used in the Contract Documents refers to Hahnfeld

Hoffer Stanford, 200 Bailey Avenue, Suite 200, Fort Worth, Texas 76107.

15017-00 01 11 00 - 2

1.4 PROJECT REFERENCES

A. Summary of References: Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to

the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, specification sections,

drawings, addenda and modifications to the contract documents issued subsequent to

the initial printing of the Project Manual and including but not necessarily limited to

printed material referenced by any of the aforementioned documents. It is recognized

that work of the Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing

regulations, natural phenomenon including weather conditions and other forces

outside the Contract Documents.

1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Space available for all construction purposed is limited to the areas

indicated on the drawings as the area of project.

1. Limit use of site and premises to allow:

a. Owner occupancy.

b. Tenant occupancy.

c. Work by Others and Work by Owner.

d. Use of surrounding streets by public.

B. Vehicular parking for Contractor employees and all construction personnel is

restricted to Owner approved parking areas.

C. Contractor’s access to the site, use of the premises and conduct of the job shall be

in strict compliance and accordance with rules and policies set forth by the Owner,

and in accordance with applicable City, County, State of Texas and Federal

Government regulations and requirements.

D. Contractor is responsible for familiarization with Owner’s rules and policies prior to

beginning any work.

E. Contractor is to abide with Owner’s instructions for scheduling work, accessing

the site, and maintaining construction site security.

F. Contractor is responsible for providing all safety measures required or implied as

necessary to protect all persons on the construction site and all persons and public

in occupied areas adjacent to construction zones.

1. Comply with applicable safety and security regulations of all authorities

having jurisdiction. These regulations set forth minimum requirements.

Contractor shall not reduce his normal safety provisions or ignore safety

regulations required by other authorities having jurisdiction where other

requirements are more stringent.

G. No alcoholic beverages, illegal drugs, controlled substances or firearms of any kind

are permitted on the construction site. Any person found on site with such in their

possession will be escorted from the premises and not permitted to return.

H. Fighting and horseplay on the construction site are absolutely forbidden.

Participants in fights will be escorted from the premises and not permitted to

return.

15017-00 01 11 00 - 3

I. Cameras are not permitted on the construction site without prior authorization from

the Owner.

J. Maintain streets and sidewalks around the Project site in a clean condition.

Remove all spillage and tracking arising from the performance for the Work from

such areas, and establish a regular maintenance program of sweeping and hosing

to minimize accumulation of dirt and dust upon such area.

K. Access to Site: Limited to construction personnel.

L. Parking and Staging Areas: Limited to Owner approved areas.

M. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Maintain access to existing building

exits at all times and as required by the City.

N. Construction Operations and Building Access: Limited to Owner approved areas.

O. Time Restrictions for Performing Interior and Exterior Work: Coordinate work areas

with Owner.

P. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Coordinate work with Owner.

Q. Construction signage to be in both English and Spanish.

1.6 WORK BY OWNER

A. Permits and Inspections: The Building Permit will be obtained and paid for by the

Owner. All other permits shall be secured by the Contractor. All inspections and

the obtaining of a valid Certification of Occupancy will be the responsibility of the

Contractor.

B. The Owner may award additional separate contracts for work related to this

project. Confirm with the Owner. Work under these contracts include:

1. Access control equipment and installation. All other rough-in by

Construction Manager.

2. Electronic Communications and Network systems except raceway.

3. Security systems equipment and installation except raceway and cabeling.

4. Furnishings and art.

C. Items noted "NIC" (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner.

D. Air and water systems for new HVAC units shall be tested and balanced by Air

Balancing Company, hired by the Owner.

1.7 CONTRACTOR DUTIES

A. VOC Compliance: Ensure that all assemblies, components, and systems comply

with all VOC (Volatile Organic Components) requirements and regulations of the

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Occupational Safety Health Administration

(OSHA), State, County, City, and Local Air Control District.

B. Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for:

15017-00 01 11 00 - 4

1. Labor, materials and equipment.

2. Tools, construction equipment and machinery.

3. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion

of work.

C. Secure and pay for, as necessary for proper execution and completion of Work, and

as applicable at time of receipt of bids:

1. Licenses.

D. Give required notices.

E. Comply with all applicable local Building Codes, ordinances, rules, regulations,

orders and other legal requirements of public authorities which bear on

performance of Work.

F. Promptly submit written notice to Architect of observed variance of Contract

Documents from requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Assume

responsibility for Work performed without such notice known to be contrary to

code or regulatory requirements.

1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Accommodate Owner’s occupancy as scheduled.

B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: The Owner reserves the

right to place and install equipment in completed areas of the project and to occupy

such completed areas prior to substantial completion, provided that such

occupancy does not interfere with completion of the work. Such placing of

equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the work or

any part of the work.

1. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's

operations.

2. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement.

C. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific

portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.

D. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before

Owner occupancy.

E. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial

service for occupied portions of building.

1.9 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GENERAL WORK

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable requirements of

Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 sections for mechanical and electrical

provisions within units of general construction work.

1. Service Connections: Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 26, and 27 sections for the

characteristics of the mechanical and electrical services to be connected to

15017-00 01 11 00 - 5

units of general work. Provide units manufactured or fabricated for proper

connection to and utilization of available services, as indicated. Except as

otherwise indicated, final connection of mechanical services to general

construction work is defined as being mechanical work, and final

connection of electrical service to general construction work is defined as

electrical work.

B. Electrical Requirements: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable

provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and standards by National

Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA), for electrical components of general

work. Provide Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled products where

applicable.

1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A. The Contractor shall maintain adequate protection of the Work from damage and

shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or loss arising from the

Work. Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times any OSHA-required

danger signs, guards, and obstructions necessary to protect the public and

construction personnel from any dangers inherent with or created by the Work in

progress.

1. All federal, state, and city rules and requirements pertaining to safety, and

all EPA standards, OSHA standards, and NESHAP regulations pertaining to

asbestos as required shall be complied with.

B. Twenty-four (24) Hour Call: The Contractor shall have personnel on call 24 hours

per day, for emergencies during the course of the Project. The Owner shall be

provided with a 24- hour emergency contact number of Contractor’s personnel.

Contractor shall be able to respond to any emergency call and have personnel

on-site within two (2) hours after contact. Numbers to be made available to the

Owner shall include home, office and mobile numbers for the following:

1. Contractor’s project manager.

2. Contractor’s field superintendent.

3. Owner or company officer of Contractor.

PART 1) - PRODUCTS (Not applicable).

PART 2) - EXECUTION (Not applicable).

- END OF SECTION 01 11 00 -

15017-00 01 23 00 -1

SECTION 01 23 00 – ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates.

B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders for certain construction

activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from

Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the

amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment,

systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents.

C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as

necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and

fully integrated into the project.

D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute

to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether

Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date.

Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates.

E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section.

Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials

and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate.

1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects

and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether

or not specifically mentioned as part of the Alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All materials related to work described in the Alternates shall be equal to that specified

for Base Bid work. Refer to each applicable section of the specifications for specific

requirements relevant to this work.

B. All work is shown and detailed on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

15017-00 01 23 00 -2


A. All means and methods related to work described in the Alternates shall be equal to

that specified for Base Bid work. Refer to each applicable section of the specifications

for specific requirements relevant to this work.

B. All work is shown and detailed on the drawings.

PART 4 - SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

4.1 ALTERNATE NO. 1 - REMOVE AND REPLACE EXISTING CURBS UNDER ROOFTOP

EQUIPMENT

A. General Requirements: Remove and replace existing curbs under rooftop equipment.

Reference Mechanical Specifications and Drawings.

B. All work shall be installed per the details shown on the drawings and the requirements

of each respective Specification Section. Installation shall be per manufacturer’s

written instructions and approved submittals.

4.2 ALTERNATE NO. 2 - REMOVE AND REPLACE CMU BELOW EXISTING SEATING TIER ALONG

THE WEST WALL AND PORTIONS OF THE EAST WALL OF MEDICAL EXAM 1, ROOM 1058

A. General Requirements: Remove and replace CMU below existing seating tier along the

west wall and portions of the east wall of Medical Exam 1, Room 1058. Approximate

floor to top of tile replacement along the west wall is 2’-8”, and approximate width of

the replacement area is 20’-0”. See drawings for east wall portions requiring

replacement. Manufacturer makes a ¾” facing tile to match the face of the existing

tiles. It is acceptable to remove and replace the face of CMU as long as the face tiles

are kept in alignment, vertically and horizontally, with the overall pattern of Structural

Glazed Tile currently visible on the subject wall.

B. All work shall be installed per the details shown on the drawings and the requirements

of each respective Specification Section. Installation shall be per manufacturer’s

written instructions and approved submittals.


SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requestsfor substitutions made after award of the Contract.

B. Standards: Refer to Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" for applicability ofindustry standards to products specified.

C. Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and productoptions are included under Section "Materials and Equipment."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning ofother terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methodsof construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor afteraward of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following arenot considered substitutions:

1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted priorto award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents andare not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.

3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in ContractDocuments.

4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations andorders issued by governing authorities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if receivedwithin 30 calendar days after commencement of the Work. Requests received morethan 30 calendar days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejectedat the discretion of the Architect.

1. Submit 4 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submitrequests on the "Request For Substitution" form included at the end of thissection.

2. Architect's Action: Within 7 calendar days of receipt of the request forsubstitution, the Architect will request additional information or documentationnecessary for evaluation of the request. Within 14 calendar days of receipt ofthe request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of the additional information ordocumentation, which ever is later, the Architect will notify the Contractor ofacceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a

15017-00 01 25 00 - 1

proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, usethe product specified by name.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered bythe Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determinedby the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to recordnoncompliance with these requirements.

1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.

2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.

3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.

4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in theContract Documents.

5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within theContract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or methodcannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly orcoordinate activities properly.

6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessaryapproval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can beapproved.

7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energyconservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsettingresponsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities forthe Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign andevaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner orseparate Contractors, and similar considerations.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a mannerthat is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies thatthe substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated withother materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitutioncan be coordinated.

10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warrantyrequired by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that theproposed substitution provide the required warranty.

B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Dataor Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the ContractDocuments does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor doesit constitute approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


15017-00 01 25 00 - 2

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST

Project:

To:

Re:

Substitution Request Number:

From:

Date:

HHS Project Number:

Contract For:

Specification Title: Description:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer: Address: Phone:

Trade Name: Model No.:

Installer: Address: Phone:

History: New product 2-5 years old 5-10 yrs old More than 10 years old

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

POINT-BY-POINT COMPARATIVE DATA ATTACHED - REQUIRED BY A/E

Reason for not providing specified item:

Similar Installation:

Project: Architect:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed:

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explain

Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ).

Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: No Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports

Page of

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST(continued)

The Undersigned certifies:

Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.

Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived.

Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution.

Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.

Submitted by:

Signed by:

Firm:

Address:

Telephone:

Attachments:

HAHNFELD HOFFER STANFORD’S (OR HHS CONSULTANT’S) REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution Approved - Make submittals in accordance with Division 1 Specification Section “Submittals” or “Submittal Procedures”.

Substitution Approved As Noted - Make submittals in accordance with Division 1 Specification Section “Submittals” or “Submittal

Procedures”.

Substitution Rejected - Use specified materials.

Substitution Request Received Too Late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date:

Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer A/E

Page of

SECTION 01 26 00 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling andprocessing Contract modifications.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to thissection:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor'sConstruction Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for administrative proceduresgoverning applications for payment.

4. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for requirements of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

5. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures forhandling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving anadjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect onAIA form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will requireadjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect, witha detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawingsand Specifications, if necessary.

1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do notconsider them instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute theproposed change.

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 14 calendar days ofreceipt of the proposal request, submit to the Architect for the Owner's reviewan estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs,along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts oftrade discounts.

15017-00 01 26 00 - 1

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Workwill have on the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforseenconditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changesby submitting a request for a change to the Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of thechange on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and ContractTime.

2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along withthe total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey datato substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of tradediscounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposedchange in the Work requires the substitution of one product or system for aproduct or system specified.

5. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work willhave on the Contract Time.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use Construction Managers Standard Change Order ProposalRequest Form.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the ConstructionManager will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Architect on AIADocument G701.

1.6 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Orderproposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multipliedby final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowance forcutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal produce imperfections, and similarmargins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part ofthe allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiatedistribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in ChangeOrders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place byindependent quantity survey, measure, or count.

15017-00 01 26 00 - 2

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of theallowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Orderamount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submitclaims within twenty one (21) days of receipt of the Change Order or ConstructionChange Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submittedlater than twenty one (21) days after such authorization.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the ChangeOrder cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of workhas changed from what could have been foreseen from information in theContract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection ofhigher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature asoriginally indicated.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directiveon AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor toproceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change inthe Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change inthe Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of workrequired by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting datanecessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)



15017-00 01 26 00 - 3

15017-00 01 26 10 - 1

SECTION 01 26 10 - REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for submitting and processing

Requests for Interpretation (RFIs) after execution of the Agreement:

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract

Documents.

1.4 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract

Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare

and submit an RFI in the form specified in Paragraph 1.4.C.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than

Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing

interpretation and the following (fill in software blanks where applicable):

1. RFI ID number, numbered sequentially.

2. Subject.

3. To: (choose Project Architect / Project Manager).

4. Contractor’s question, which shall include:

a. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as

appropriate.

b. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

c. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

d. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact

the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact

in the RFI.

15017-00 01 26 10 - 2

5. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos,

Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully

describe items needing interpretation. Provide attachments in .pdf format.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include

dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of

affected materials,

C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same

content as indicated above.

1. RFIs shall be submitted thru Architect’s Newforma Info Exchange (link

provided by Architect).

a. Software contractor must have computer with internet access and a

web browser.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and

return it. Allow seven (7) calendar days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs

received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. RFIs not submitted per Paragraph 1.4.C.

b. Requests for approval of submittals.

c. Requests for approval of substitutions.

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the

Contract Documents.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

g. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

h. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in

which case Architect's time for response will start again.

i. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to

submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section 01 26 00

"Modification Procedures."

j. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within

ten (10) calendar days of receipt of the RFI response.

k. RFIs involving request for remedial action to correct nonconforming

work, which are returned in more than ten (10) calendar days, are

not eligible for Contractor’s request for an increase in Contract Sum

or an extension of Contract Time.

15017-00 01 26 10 - 3

E. On receipt of Architect's action, immediately distribute the RFI response to affected

parties. Review response and notify Architect within ten (10) calendar days if

Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI

number. Submit updated log at each Construction Progress Meeting. Provide

software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect's response was received.

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


Welcome: John Q. Contractor

Current Project: 00000-00 Project Name

Home > Project Site > Send an RFI

Project Site - 00000-00 Project Name Home Send an RFI Project Information Enter your question for the RFI in the form below, then select Send RFI. Project Site

File Transfers ID:

Action Items Subject:

Info Exchange Folders To: Click the label to the left to select team members.

Contract Administration

Project Team CC:

Project Description

Project Calendar Question:

Common Questions

Reminders: If a recipient has not downloaded the Transmittal, do not send a notification.

Contents: Choose File no file selected To transfer multiple files, zip the files together then browse to the zip file. Click here for instructions on how to zip files. Maximum file transfer size is 2,048 MB. Send RFI

Files in this transfer till expire on 00/00/0000 and will no longer be available for the recipients To download.

LOGOUT

GO Search: GO

Newformant Community Site / Video Tutorials / Help / ?

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing theContractor's Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with theContractor's Construction Schedule and List of Subcontractors.

B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule is included in Section "Construction ProgressDocumentation".

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor'sConstruction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrativeschedules and forms, including:

a. Contractor's construction schedule.

b. Application for Payment form.

c. List of subcontractors.

d. Schedule of allowances.

e. Schedule of alternates.

f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, butin no case later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initialApplication for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establishthe format for the Schedule of Values.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule ofValues:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of the Architect.

c. Project number.

15017-00 01 29 00 - 1

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns toindicate the following for each item listed:

a. Generic name.

b. Dollar value.

c. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent,adjusted to total 100 percent.

d. Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitatecontinued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Breakprincipal subcontract amounts down into several line items.

4. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the ContractSum.

5. Margins of Cost: Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications forPayment shall be complete including its total cost and proportionate share ofgeneral overhead and profit margin.

a. At the Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost itemsthat are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown as separateline items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overheadexpense.

6. Substantiating Data:

a. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifyingitem amounts in question.

b. On allowance items, submit actual invoice from supplier of product orservice.

c. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal.Show Application number and date, and line item by number anddescription.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT:

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications andpayments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner.

1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time ofSubstantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additionalrequirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is as indicated in theAgreement Form. The period of construction Work covered by each Application forPayment is the period indicated in the Construction Agreement.

15017-00 01 29 00 - 2

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703as the form for Application for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization andexecution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be returned without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's ConstructionSchedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made.

2. Include amounts of approved Change Orders issued prior to the last day of theconstruction period covered by the application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to theArchitect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete,including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recordingappropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to theArchitect.

F. Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede orcoincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors approved for award.

2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators approved at time of submission.

3. Schedule of Values.

4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

5. List of Contractor’s Staff Assignments.

6. Copies of Building Permits.

7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performanceof the work.

8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

9. Report of pre-construction meeting.

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of theCertificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; thisapplication shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issuedpreviously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

H. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with thisapplication include:

1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.

2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.

3. Test/adjust/balance records.

15017-00 01 29 00 - 3

4. Maintenance instructions.

5. Meter readings (if applicable).

6. Start-up performance reports.

7. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation andmaintenance.

8. Final cleaning.

9. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety.

10. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate ofSubstantial Completion.

I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precedeor coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:

1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.

3. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner.

4. Removal of temporary facilities and services.

5. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.

6. Change of door locks to Owner's access.




15017-00 01 29 00 - 4

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes:

1. Coordination of Work of the Contract.

2. Preconstruction conferences.

3. Scheduling and administration of progress meetings.

4. Pre-installation conferences.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of Specificationsto assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, withprovisions for accommodating items to be installed later.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section “Submittals” specifies procedures for preparing andsubmitting the Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

3. Division 01 Section “Materials and Equipment” specifies procedures forcoordinating general installation.

4. Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures” specifies procedures forcoordinating contract closeout.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A. Carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabricationand installation of Work. Promptly advise Architect of any error, inconsistency,omission, or apparent discrepancy discovered.

B. Allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect, and for establishingprocedures for handling queries and clarifications. Use standard "Request forInterpretation", form as approved by Architect for requesting information.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 1

C. If Architect is able to respond to a request for interpretation by making specificreference to Drawing sheet or Specification Section, Contractor shall reimburseOwner for charges of Architect and Architect’s Consultants for performing reviewservices for the Contractor.

D. In addition to meetings specified herein, hold coordination meetings and conferenceswith personnel and subcontractors to ensure coordination of Work.

E. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various Specification sections toavoid conflicts and ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation ofinterdependent construction elements.

F. Coordinate Work of various Specification sections having interdependentresponsibilities for installation, connection, and operation.

G. Verify that characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with buildingutilities and services.

H. Except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, conduit and wiring inconstruction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

I. Make provision to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

J. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actuallyincorporated into the Work.

K. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructionsand recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendationsare more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.

L. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior toinstallation. Reject damaged and defective items.

M. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securingWork. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and buildingmovement.

N. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints inexposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to theArchitect for final decision.

O. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.

P. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensurethe best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction fromincompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.

Q. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize thenecessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 2

R. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individualcomponents at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry and asrequired by the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) for the particular applicationindicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for finaldecision.

S. Cleaning and Protection:

1. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progressand adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required toensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

2. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessarythrough the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricateoperable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

3. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no partof the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful,dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during theconstruction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are notlimited to, the following:

Excessive static or dynamic loading.Excessive internal or external pressures.Excessively high or low temperatures.Thermal shock.Excessively high or low humidity.Air contamination or pollution.Water or ice.Solvents.Chemicals.Light.Radiation.Puncture.Abrasion.Heavy traffic.Soiling, staining and corrosion.Bacteria.Rodent and insect infestation.Combustion.Electrical current.High speed operation.Improper lubrication.Unusual wear or other misuse.Contact between incompatible materials.Destructive testing.Misalignment.Excessive weathering.Unprotected storage.Improper shipping or handling.Theft.Vandalism.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 3

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS AND LAYOUTS

A. General:

1. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and are not to be submitted toArchitect for approval.

2. Coordination drawings show relationship and integration of different constructionelements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit inspace provided or to function as intended.

3. Prepare composite coordination drawings to scale of 1:50 (1/4"=1’-0") or larger;detailing major elements, components, and systems of architectural, structural,mechanical, and electrical equipment and materials in relationship with each other,installations, and building components. Include dimensions.

4. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and wheresequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to efficient flow ofWork affecting one or more trades.

5. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipmentinto building during construction.

6. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors,walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

7. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outletsand inlets, light fixtures, communications systems components, sprinklers, andother ceiling-mounted devices.

8. Show interrelationship of components to be shown on separate Shop Drawings.

9. Indicate required installation sequences.

10. CAD drawing files may be released by the Architect to the Contractor (at nocharge) and/or his Subcontractors (at $50.00 per requested individual sheet) afterexecution of a formal electronic document release form which may be obtainedfrom the Architect.

B. Structural Systems: Include, but do not necessarily limit to following:

1. Structural frame showing interface with exterior cladding.

2. Location of openings in relation to structure.

3. Show attachments to decking, structural elements, and other systems.

C. Mechanical Systems: Include, but do not necessarily limit to following:

1. Proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials.

2. Proposed locations for access panels and doors.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 4

3. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

4. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filterremoval, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. Show access locations.

5. Equipment connections and support details.

6. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

7. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

8. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

9. Valve stem movement.

D. Electrical Systems: Include, but do not necessarily limit to following:

1. Proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials.

2. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassemblyrequired for periodic maintenance. Show access locations.

3. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

4. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

5. Equipment connections and support details.

6. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

E. Coordinate in field with affected trades for proper relationship to Work based on Projectconditions.

F. Notify Architect of conflicts and other coordination issues requiring resolution prior tocommencing construction in each affected area.

G. Submit Contractor’s certification to Architect that coordination documents have beencompleted and coordination issues have been identified and resolved prior tocommencing construction in each affected area.

H. Make coordination documents available in field office for review by Architect and Ownerduring entire period of construction.

1.7 MEETINGS

A. In addition to progress meetings, hold coordination meetings and pre-installationconferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of Work.Provide a minimum two (2) working day notice to the Architect and Owner formeetings.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 5

1.8 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01 33 00.

B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operatingelements, and effect on work of other sections.

1.9 COORDINATION OF SPACE

A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical, andelectrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shownfor pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for availablephysical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently tomaximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

B. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in theconstruction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

C. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in theconstruction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

D. Layout of plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, and electrical systems, equipment,fixtures, piping, ductwork, conduit, specialty items, and accessories indicated onDrawings is diagrammatic. Variations in alignment, elevation, and details required toavoid interferences and satisfy architectural and structural limitations are not necessarilyshown.

E. Prior to installation of material and equipment, review and coordinate Work withArchitectural and Structural Drawings to establish exact space conditions. Whereavailable space is inadequate or where reasonable modifications are not possible,request information from Architect before proceeding.

F. Coordinate installation to prevent conflicts and cooperate in making, without extracharge, reasonable modifications in layout as needed.

G. Provide clear access to control points, valves, strainers, control devices, and specialtyitems of every nature related to such systems and equipment to obtain maximum headroom. Provide adequate clearances as necessary for operation and maintenance.

1.10 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation forSubstantial Completion of portions of Work designated for Owner partial occupancy.

B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections forcorrection of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, tominimize disruption of Owner's activities.

C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01 77 00.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 6

1.11 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Architect will schedule conference within 14 calendar days after the “Notice ToProceed”.

B. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Contractor and representatives of major subcontractors,and others as appropriate.

C. Architect presides over meeting and is responsible for recording and distributingminutes.

D. Agenda

1. Submittal of executed bonds and insurance certificates.

2. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

3. Distribution of Contract Documents.

4. Submittal of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, andprogress schedule.

5. Designation of responsible personnel. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice toProceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including theSuperintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals,their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers.

6. Procedures, processing, and formats for field decisions, submittals, substitutions,applications for payments, proposal requests, change orders, and Contractcloseout procedures. Formats used by Architect and Contractor must besubmitted to Architect and Owner at this time and must conform to Ownerrequirements.

7. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.

8. Owner's requirements.

9. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.

10. Survey and building layout.

11. Security, safety, and housekeeping procedures.

12. Schedules and sequencing.

13. Procedures for testing.

14. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

15. Requirements for startup and delivery of equipment.

16. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during constructionperiod.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 7

17. Notification procedures for emergencies:

a. Special Note: Contractor is to notify Owner and Architect immediately upon occurrence of any incident involving personal injury, property damage,

interruption of a utility source, or an other emergency. Contractor is to file a written follow-up report to Owner within 24 hours of incident.

1.12 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer weekly construction progress meetings, throughout progress of Work. Provide a minimum two (2) working day notice to the Architect and Owner for meetings.

1. Prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to participants.

2. Make physical arrangements.

3. Preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies after meeting toparticipants, and to entities affected by decisions at meetings. (Minutes frommeetings to be distributed within 72 hours after meeting.)

4. Distribute one copy of minutes to Architect and one to Owner.

5. Maintain in field office one copy of agenda and minutes for each conference andmeeting.

B. Location of Meetings: Contractor's field office.

C. Attendance: Contractor, job superintendent, subcontractors, and suppliers asappropriate to agenda; Owner, Architect, and professional consultants as appropriate.

D. Anticipated Agenda

1. Approval of minutes of previous meeting.

2. Work progress since previous meeting:

a. Current activities.

b. Critical activities.

c. Deviations from schedule.

3. Field observations, problems, conflicts, and decisions.

4. Deficiencies:

a. Identification of items.

b. Status of correction.

5. Requests for Interpretations (RFIs):

15017-00 01 31 00 - 8

a. Status of clarification.

b. Status of proposal requests.

6. Changes and Modifications:

a. Status of change orders.

b. Pending changes.

c. Pending claims and disputes.

d. Clarification decisions of Architect or Owner.

7. Problems and conflicts which impede planned progress.

8. Construction Progress and Submittal Schedules:

a. Off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

b. Effect of proposed changes on construction progress schedule andcoordination.

c. Submittal schedules, status of submittals, and effect on construction progress schedule.

d. Corrective measures to regain projected schedule.

9. Planned progress during succeeding Work period. (Provide a “look ahead”schedule).

10. Adequacy of work forces.

11. Coordination between elements of Work.

12. Maintenance of Project Record Documents.

13. Other business relating to progress of Work.

E. Meeting Minutes:

1. Include column to indicate who is required to take action and date action is to becompleted. Each of these items requiring action will be carried in subsequentminutes of meeting as "old business" until noted as "resolved."

2. As minimum, separate into following categories:

a. Old business.

b. New business.

c. Work progress.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 9

d. Deficiencies.

e. RFIs.

f. Proposed changes.

g. Schedules.

h. Submittals.

i. Other business, including events to be accomplished by next meeting.

j. “Look ahead” schedule.

1.13 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. Schedule pre-installation conferences required in individual Specification sections. Convene at Project site prior to commencing Work of the section.

B. Attendees:

1. Project superintendent; presides over meeting and is responsible for minutes.

2. Subcontractor (installer, applicator, or erector).

3. Material or equipment supplier.

4. Manufacturers’ representative.

5. Others directly affecting, or affected by the work.

6. Testing agency (if necessary).

7. Subcontractors, as appropriate.

8. Owner, Architect, and professional consultants may attend as appropriate.

9. Others as appropriate to agenda.

C. Notify Architect and Owner minimum four (4) working days in advance of meetingdate.

D. Minimum Agenda:

1. Access to work and conditions of proper installation.

2. Conditions of installation, such as substrates, existing and surroundingconditions, and environmental conditions.

3. Conditions detrimental to installation.

4. Preparation procedures, including protection of adjacent work.

15017-00 01 31 00 - 10

5. Verify installers’ receipt and understanding of installation instructions.

6. Review submittals, installation procedures, and sequence.

7. Review coordination with other work.

8. Evaluate delivery schedule and Construction Progress Schedule.

9. Observe sample installation.

10. Required protection procedures.

11. Change order proceures.

12. Safety.

13. Inspection and testing.

14. Required performance results.

15. Recording requirements.

E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, andcoordination with related work.

1.14 CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE

A. Schedule Project Closeout conference prior to requesting Substantial Completion.

B. Attendees:

1. Contractor; presides over meeting and is responsible for minutes.

2. Major subcontractors.

3. Owner, Architect, and professional consultants may attend as appropriate.

4. Others as appropriate to agenda.

C. Minimum Agenda:

1. Start-up of facilities and systems.

2. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3. System demonstration and observation.

4. Operation and maintenance instructions for the owner’s personnel.

5. Contractor’s inspection of work.

6. Contractor’s preparation of an initial "punch list."

15017-00 01 31 00 - 11

7. Procedure to request Architect and Owner inspection to determine date ofsubstantial completion.

8. Completion time for correcting deficiencies.

9. Inspections by authorities having jurisdiction.

10. Certificate of occupancy and transfer of insurance responsibilities.

11. Partial release of retainage.

12. Preparation for final inspection.

13. Closeout submittals:

a. Project Record Documents.

b. Operating and maintenance documents.

c. Operating and maintenance materials.

d. Warranties and bonds.

e. Affidavits.

14. Final application for payment.

15. Final cleaning.

16. Contractor’s demobilization of site.

17. Maintenance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

(Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION

(Not Applicable)


15017-00 01 31 00 - 12

SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Procedures for preparation and submittal of construction progress schedules andperiodical updating

2. Construction progress photographs.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 11 00, Summary of Work.

2. Section 01 33 00, Submittals.

1.3 SCHEDULES

A. Format

1. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Critical Path Construction Schedule for theWork. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the ContractDocuments and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Contractorshall prosecute the work as required to start and complete each phase of thework on or before the dates stated.

2. Should actual construction of project vary from the schedule, Contractor shalltake whatever actions are necessary to improve progress as quickly as possiblein order to meet predetermined milestones. Revise and re-submit schedule whenthe actual schedule is ahead or behind by more than 14 calendar days. Theschedule will be reviewed monthly by the Architect's and Owner’s representative.

3. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.

4. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions.

5. Sheet Size: Minimum 11 x 17 inches.

B. Content

1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginningand completion of each element of construction.

2. Identify each item by major Specification section number.

3. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.

4. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule.

15017-00 01 32 00 - 1

5. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products.

C. Revisions

1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completiondata of each activity.

2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, andother identifiable changes.

3. Provide report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact onSchedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.

D. Distribution

1. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to Owner, Architect, subcontractors,suppliers, and other concerned entities.

2. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated byprojections shown in Schedules.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photography

1. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work.

2. Take photographs on cutoff date for each Application for Payment.

3. Take a minimum of 3 photographs weekly and at beginning and completion ofelements of construction:

a. Demolition.

b. Structural modifications.

c. Framing/blocking.

d. Final completion.

B. Prints

1. Full color; 2 prints of each view.

2. Paper: Single weight, neutral black image tone, white base.

3. Finish: Smooth surface, glossy.

4. Size: 8 by 10 inch. Mount with binder tabs.

5. Identify each print on back. List name of Project, phase, orientation of view,date and time of view, name and address of photographer, and photographer'snumbered identification of exposure.

15017-00 01 32 00 - 2

C. Digital Images

1. All construction progress photos in digital format are to be delivered in athree-ring binder with the Project Record Documents at Project Closeout. Catalog and index images in chronological sequence. Include CD (in JPG orTIFF format for PC’s) with image indexed files.

D. Technique

1. Provide factual presentation.

2. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness,maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion.

E. Views

1. Provide non-aerial photographs from a sufficient number of views at eachspecified time in order to sufficiently document the progress of the work,until Date of Substantial Completion. Aerial photographs may be submittedin addition to, but not as a substitute for required views.

2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Progress Schedules:

1. Submit initital Schedules within 14 calendar days from Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 7 calendar days.

2. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.

3. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus1 copy retained by Architect and 1 copy retained by Owner.

B. Construction Photographs:

1. Deliver prints with each Application for Payment.

2. Digital images on CD of all construction photographs shall be delivered withthe Project Record Documents as stated in Paragraph 1.4 C above.




15017-00 01 32 00 - 3

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittalsrequired for performance of the Work, including;

1. Submittal procedures.

2. Construction reports.

3. Recording Contract Document Changes.

4. Shop Drawings.

5. Product Data.

6. Samples.

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 01 Sections and other ContractDocuments for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, butare not limited to:

1. Permits.

2. Applications for payment.

3. Insurance certificates.

4. List of Subcontractors.

C. The construction schedule is included in Section "Construction ProgressDocumentation".

D. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section "Payment Procedures."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Shop Drawings: Include drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by Contractor or a subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

B. Product Data: Include illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,

instructions, brochures, diagrams, test data and other information furnished by

Contractor to illustrate material, product or system for some portion of the Work.

C. Samples: Physical examples illustrating materials, equipment or workmanship to

establish standards by which the Work will be judged. Samples include field samples.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 1

D. Quality Control Submittals: Pertain to quality control and Owner information which do

not require review and approval by Architect and are to be retained for project file only.

If reviewed, project information will be reviewed for compliance with the Contract

Documents only. The review will not constitute a detailed review of adequacy of

submitted design calculations. The appropriateness and accuracy of calculations is the

responsibility of the submitting Contractor (and Contractor's Professional Engineer

when such calculations are required to be professionally sealed). Examples of quality

control submittals:

1. Design data and calculations.

2. Test reports.

3. Certifications.

4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

5. Manufacturer’s field reports.

E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Pertain to contract closeout related information which

do not require review and approval by the Architect and are to be retained for project

file only. Examples of contract closeout submittals:

1. Project record information.

2. Warranties.

3. Operation and maintenance data.

4. Owner instruction reports.

F. Administrative Submittals: Refer to General and Special Conditions for requirements

for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to:

1. Permits.

2. Applications for payment.

3. Insurance certificates.

4. List of Subcontractors.

5. Schedule of Values.

G. Field Samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes,coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard bywhich the Work will be judged.

H. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination,testing, or operation; they are not Samples.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 2

I. Newforma Info Exchange: Software that enables transfer of files to and from internaland external users over the internet. Newforma Info Exchange is hosted on servers atthe Architect’s office and available to external users thru the use of an internetbrowser.

J. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by AdobeSystems used for representing documents in a device-independent and displayresolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performanceof construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance ofperformance of related construction activities to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, othersubmittals and related activities that require sequential activity, including contentof prior submittals (with revisions) and any field changes reflected.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of theWork so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittalsconcurrently for coordination.

a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiringcoordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as aresult of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. Timefor review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal.

1. Internal Review: Allow up to fourteen (14) calendar days for review. Allowadditional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination withsubsequent submittals.

2. Concurrent Review: When concurrent review of submittals by Architect’sconsultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow up to fourteen (14)calendar days for initial review of each submittal.

3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where approved in advance by Architect, submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect’s consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architectbefore being returned to Contractor. Allow a minimum of ten (10) calendar daysfor consultant review.

4. Allow up to fourteen (14) calendar days for processing each re-submittal.

5. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmitsubmittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permitprocessing.

6. Contractor shall maintain in field office a copy of submittal schedule and log ofsubmittals indicating status of each item.

C. Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.

1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording actiontaken.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 3

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name and address of Contractor.

e. Name and address of subcontractor.

f. Name and address of supplier.

g. Unique identifier, including revision number.

h. Name and address of manufacturer.

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

k. Other necessary identification.

2. Provide on the label or beside the title block on the submittal a place to recordthe Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.

a. The Contractor's review markings must include the following information:

"This shop drawing has been reviewed by [Name of Contractor] andapproved with respect to the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incidentalthereto. [Name of Contractor] also warrants that this shop drawingcomplies with contract documents and comprises no variations thereto.”

b. SUBMITTALS WITH NO REMARKS OR NOTATIONS MADE BY THECONTRACTOR WILL BE RETURNED AS NOT SATISFYINGCONTRACTOR’S REVIEW REQUIREMENT.

D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

E. Hardcopy Submittal Transmittal: Assemble complete submittal package incorporatingsubmittal requirements of a single Specification Section with a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned withoutaction.

1. Transmittal Form: Provide a transmittal form for each submittal including thefollowing information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Destination (To:).

d. Source (From:).

e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

f. Category and type of submittal.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 4

g. Submittal purpose and description.

h. Remarks.

i. Signature of transmitter.

F. Architect’s Digital Data Files: One set of electronic digital data files of the architecturalportion of the Contract Drawings (A-x sheets) can be provided by CD, DVD, orNewforma Info Exchange (FTP) by the Architect for the Contractor’s use in preparingsubmittals.

1. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digitaldata drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

2. Digital Drawing Software Program: The digital data drawing files are available inthe latest version of Revit or AutoCAD (depending on which was used by theArchitect to produce the project). Digital data drawing files will not be convertedto another software format.

3. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Architect’sDrawing Release Form (attached at the end of this Section).

4. For digital data drawing files pertaining to disciplines other than architectualdrawings, Contractor will need to contact each discipline individually. Eachdiscipline may have their own requirements in regards to file format, licensingagreement, and cost for such drawings.

1.5 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Prepare daily construction report, recording the following information concerning eventsat the site; and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at monthly intervals withApplications for Payment:

1. List of subcontractors at the site.

2. Approximate count of personnel at the site.

3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.

4. Accidents and unusual events.

5. Meetings and significant decisions.

6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.

7. Orders and requests of governing authorities.

8. Change Orders received, implemented.

9. Services connected, disconnected.

10. Equipment or system tests and start-ups.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 5

1.6 RECORDING CONTRACT DOCUMENT CHANGES

A. Contract Drawings/Shop Drawings: Furnish and maintain, at the jobsite, a clean, undamaged set of xerographic prints of Contract Drawings and one set of xerographicprints of Shop Drawings. Mark each to show the actual installed conditions where theinstallation varies from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever document ismost capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings areused, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings.Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure andrecord at a later date.

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, orotherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduceContract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is notconsidered Shop Drawings.

B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams,schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. Do not use Shop Drawingswithout an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection withconstruction. Include the following information:

1. Dimensions.

2. Identification of products and materials included.

3. Compliance with specified standards.

4. Fabrication and installation drawings.

5. Rough-in and setting diagrams.

6. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, andcontrol wiring.

7. Design calculations.

8. Notation of coordination requirements.

9. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

C. Hardcopy Submittals: Unless directed otherwise, submit a minimum of five copies ofall shop drawings to Architect or Consultant and concurrently one copy to Owner.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed PDF file incorporatingsubmittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form withlinks enabling navigation to each item within the submittal.

2. Name file with submittal number, including revision identifier when applicable.

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor’s review andapproval markings and action taken by Architect.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 6

4. Means of Transmittal for Electronic Submittals: Contractor shall use Architect’sNewforma Info Exchange website. A link to the website will be provided to theContractor at time of Pre-Construction Meeting.

5. Electronic Submittal Limitations: Submittals must meet the requirements belowto be accepted electronically. Submittals not meeting these requirements mustbe submitted in hardcopy format (refer to Paragraph 1.9 C). NOTE: Electronicsubmittals not meeting these requirements will automatically be rejected.

a. Page Size: No larger than 8.5" x 11". Drawing sheet sizes 11" x 17" and larger are not permitted.

b. Page Count: No more than 50 pages (single sided).

c. Quality: Submittals must be clearly ledgible. Poor quality scans will be rejected.

1.8 PRODUCT DATA

A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installationinstructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates,standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must bespecially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as"Shop Drawings."

1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed ProductData includes information on several products, some of which are not required,mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the followinginformation:

a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.

b. Compliance with recognized trade association and testing agency standards.

c. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.

d. Notation of Coordination requirements.

2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the ContractDocuments has been confirmed.

3. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors,suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance ofconstruction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Dataapplicable is in the installer's possession.

b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection withconstruction.

B. Unless directed otherwise, submit a minimum of five copies of all product data toArchitect or Consultant and concurrently one copy to Owner.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 7

1.9 SAMPLES

A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physicallyidentical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections ofmanufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color rangesets, and actual swatches showing color, texture and pattern.

1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualitiesindicated. Include the following:

a. Generic description of the Sample.

b. Sample source.

c. Product name or name of manufacturer.

d. Compliance with recognized standards.

e. Availability and delivery time.

2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final checkof these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of thesecharacteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as deliveredand installed.

a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherentin the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3),that show approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples thatillustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly,connections, operation and similar construction characteristics.

c. Regarding Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in theWork: Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On thetransmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Samplesubmittals.

3. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship,fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit2 sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken.

4. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisonsthroughout the course of construction.

B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors,manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performanceof the Work.

1. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. FieldSamples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, orfinish materials and to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

15017-00 01 33 00 - 8

1.10 ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER REVIEW

A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action andreturn is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark toindicate action taken, and return promptly.

1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Do not make "Mass" submittals (6 or more submittals) to Architect at one time. IfMass submittals are received, Architect’s review time stated above will be extendedas necessary to perform proper review. Architect will review Mass submittals basedupon priority determined by Architect after consultation with Owner and Contractor.

C. Informational submittals and other similar data are for Architect’s information and donot require Architect’s responsive action.

D. Architect’s review and approval of submittals does not relieve Contractor of

responsibility for deviations from Contract Document requirements, unless Architect is

informed in writing of deviations and approval is received in writing from Architect for

such deviation.

E. Architect’s review and acceptance of submittals does not indicate acceptance of

changes in Contract time or cost.

F. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by Contract Documents may be

returned without action.

G. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform,

self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to

indicate the action taken:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Approved," that part

of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with

requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that

compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Furnish as

Corrected," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided

it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the

Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Rejected, Revise and

Submit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal,

including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a

new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat

if necessary to obtain a different action mark.

a. Do not permit submittals marked "Rejected, Revise and Submit" to be used

at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes,

special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked

"Action Not Required".

15017-00 01 33 00 - 9

1.11 INCOMPLETE AND PARTIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Incomplete Submittal: Submittal not complying with specified submittal

requirements.

B. Partial Submittal: Submittal subdivided into components as indicated in submittal

schedule and each component submitted separately, including content of prior

submittals (with revisions) and any field changes reflected.

C. Architect will not review incomplete submittals. Complete submittals for each item

are required. Submittal will not be considered official until it is complete in every

respect. Delays resulting from incomplete submittals are not responsibility of

Architect.

1.12 RE-SUBMITTALS

A. Make re-submittal under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changesmade since previous submittal.

B. Architect will record time required to review re-submittals after original submittaland first re-submittal. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for charges of Architectand Architect’s consultants for reviewing submittal more than 2 times.

1.13 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certificationsby a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the ContractDocuments, provide products and systems complying with specific performance anddesign criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certificationrequired, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittals: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and otherrequired submittals, submit five copies of a statement, signed and sealed by theresponsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned toContractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and designcriteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and otherfactors used in performing these services.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).


15017-00 01 33 00 - 10

SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes orschedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications,and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the readerlocate the reference; no limitation on location is intended.

C. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected,""approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect,""requested by the Architect," and similar phrases.

D. Approved: The term "approved," where used in conjunction with the Architect'saction on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to theArchitect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

E. Regulations: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawfulorders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, andagreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project site,ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations."

G. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including theactual "unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning,and similar operations."

H. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready forthe intended use."

I. Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor,either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier for performance ofa particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, andsimilar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations theyare engaged to perform.

1. Trades: Use of titles such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply thatcertain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionizedindividuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It alsodoes not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively totradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

2. The term experienced, when used with the term installer, means having aminimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project,being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having compliedwith requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

15017-00 01 42 00 - 1

3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require thatspecific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who arerecognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged forthose activities, and their assignments are requirements over which theContractor has no choice or option. However, the ultimate responsibility forfulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor.

This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing buildingcodes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended tointerfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similarconventions.

J. Project Site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of constructionactivities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work aspart of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings andmay or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Projectis to be built.

K. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to performspecific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to reporton and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sectionsbased on the Construction Specifications Institute's MasterFormat 2004 Versionnumbering system.

B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in the use oflanguage and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when usedin particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained asfollows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other ContractDocuments is the abbreviated type. Words and meanings shall beinterpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated shall beinterpolated as the sense required. Singular words will be interpreted asplural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and thecontext of the Contract Documents so indicates.

2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by theContractor. At certain locations in the text, for clarity, subjective languageis used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by theContractor, or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference wherever acolon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include morestringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the sameforce and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to theextent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents byreference.

15017-00 01 42 00 - 2

B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standard in effect as of the date of the ContractDocuments.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards isspecified, and the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements forminimum quantities or quality levels. Refer requirements that are different, butapparently equal, and uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown orspecified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actualinstallation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or qualityspecified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Incomplying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimumor maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Referuncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is requiredto be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's constructionactivity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the ContractDocuments.

1. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a requiredconstruction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from thepublication source.

E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standardsare frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in theSpecifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of thetrade association, standards-producing organization, authorities having jurisdiction,or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to GaleResearch’s "Encyclopedia of Associations" or Columbia Books’ “National Trade &Professional Associations of the U.S.,” which are available in most libraries.

1.5 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES

A. The Architect has contacted authorities having jurisdiction where necessary toobtain information necessary for preparation of Contract Documents. Contactauthorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearingon the Work.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies ofpermits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictionalsettlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents,correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance withstandards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.




15017-00 01 42 00 - 3

SECTION 01 50 00 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls,including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Water service and distribution.

2. Temporary electric power and light.

3. Temporary heat.

4. Ventilation.

5. Telephone service.

6. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Field offices and storage sheds (optional).

2. Temporary enclosures.

3. Hoists.

4. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.

5. Waste disposal services.

6. Rodent and pest control.

7. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Temporary fire protection.

2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.

3. Environmental protection.

15017-00 01 50 00 - 1

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Building code requirements.

2. Health and safety regulations.

3. Utility company regulations.

4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.

5. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "SafetyRequirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library"Temporary Electrical Facilities."

1. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services",prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations.

2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulationsfor temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70"National Electric Code."

C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test eachtemporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities asthe Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere withprogress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous,dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.

1.6 SAFETY

A. Contractor assumes responsibility for all jobsite safety.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may useundamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materialssuitable for use intended.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils minimum thickness, withflame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.

C. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rockwool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively.

15017-00 01 50 00 - 2

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor mayuse undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipmentsuitable for use intended.

B. Water Hoses: Provide heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses withpressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.

C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to preventinsertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacleoutlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light forconnection of power tools and equipment.

D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cordswhere exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connectseparate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas whereconstruction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattagerequired for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosureswhere exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled byUL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel beingconsumed.

G. Field Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction withlockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide unit of sufficientsize to accommodate required office personnel at the Project site and all requiredprogress or other standard meetings.

H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of thechemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented andfully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbentmaterial.

I. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.

J. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishersfor temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried,portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination ofextinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures.

1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, andsize required by location and class of fire exposure.

K. Temporary Use of Permanent Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation Systems:

1. The Owner will allow use of permanent systems for construction heating, cooling, and ventilation. After all drywall and masonry work is completed inside the building, and the mechanical and electrical rooms are dry and clean, at the discretion of the Architect’s Representative, the Owner may allow the use of permanent systems. Provisions for permanent and temporary power and utilities are the responsibility of the Contractor.

15017-00 01 50 00 - 3

2. Heat, ventilation, and cooling furnished by the permanent systems necessary for the building prior to the Owner’s acceptance of responsibility for the permanent systems is defined as temporary HVAC Work.

3. If the use of permanent systems is approved, equipment must be under control with sufficient safeties in place to prevent equipment damage and damage to building, enclosure, or building materials.

4. If the use of permanent systems is approved, provide filters for air handling units as specified in Division 23. Provide additional media sets as required during operation period.

5. If the use of permanent systems is approved, clean piping, ductwork, coils, and parts of permanent systems to the satisfaction of the Architect’s Representative before placing the permanent systems in operation for use by the Owner.

6. If the use of permanent systems is approved, warranties by the manufacturer and installer of the equipment and system components, when used for either temporary or permanent heating, cooling, or ventilation, shall commence on the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities wherethey will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference withperformance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modifyas required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced byauthorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to connect to existing servicewhere required. Where company provides only part of the service, provide theremainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with companyrequirements.

1. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction.

2. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary utilities tied into the Ownersexisting services (electrical power, water, gas, except Contractor’s telephoneservice) shall be paid for by the Owner, but will not be inconvenienced by theContractor’s use. Do not permit wasteful use of utilities.

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressuresadequate for construction until permanent water service is in use.

1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.

C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric powerservice and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristicsduring construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protecteddisconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear asrequired.

15017-00 01 50 00 - 4

1. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where leastexposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts,ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cablewhere overhead and exposed.

3.3 TEMPORARY SERVICES

A. Temporary Lighting: When roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lightingwith local switching.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protectionrequirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lightingthat will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and trafficconditions.

B. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curingor drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction fromadverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that willnot have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required andminimize consumption of energy.

C. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system,provide vented, self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual spacethermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating unitsis prohibited.

D. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout theconstruction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities. The Owner'stelephones shall not be used.

1. The use of cellular telephones is acceptable.

E. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, andmaintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve theProject's needs.

1. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units.

2. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized tap-dispenser, drinking-waterunits, including paper supply or bottled water.

3. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materialsfor each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and supportfacilities for easy access.

1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior toSubstantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion willbe permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to theOwner.

15017-00 01 50 00 - 5

B. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within theconstruction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with requirements ofNFPA 241.

C. Field Offices: Install field offices at locations acceptable to Owner and in accordancewith City requirements. Keep the office clean and orderly.

D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished,and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporaryutility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the buildingor elsewhere on-site.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction,in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations,and similar activities.

1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete,provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containmentof heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curingrequirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

2. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials.

3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction.

4. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, useUL-labeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.

F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and othersigns as required by local, state and federal regulations. Install signs to inform thepublic and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing ofpreservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.

G. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewheredaily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible wastematerial and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Handle hazardous, dangerous, orunsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.

H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner or areas outside the constructionzone.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped onoccupied side, and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet oneach side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extendingsheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints.

3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required byauthorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the ratedassemblies.

4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and

15017-00 01 50 00 - 6

security locks where openings are required.

5. Protect air-handling equipment.

6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

I. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, andutilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor’s Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Documentvisible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

3.6 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change overfrom use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities untilSubstantial Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect.

B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanentfacilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed toprotect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply withNFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard forSafeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations."

1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intendedpurpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usablestairwell.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.

3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smokingin hazardous fire-exposure areas.

4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heatingunits, and similar sources of fire ignition.

5. Take every possible precaution to guard against and to eliminate possible firehazards to prevent damage to the building and adjacent buildings.

C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project,complete installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connectedservices, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirementsfor erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics,and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protectedagainst. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red oramber lights.

E. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

15017-00 01 50 00 - 7

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, andminimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated orpolluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools andequipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools andequipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability oftemporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protectfrom damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieveindicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers forunderground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.

C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer,remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorizeduse of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, ifnecessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because ofinterference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposedsurfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used duringthe construction period including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings if required.

b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operatingconditions.

c. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use.


15017-00 01 50 00 - 8

SECTION 01 60 00 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing theContractor's selection of products for use in the Project.

B. Standards: Refer to Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" for applicability ofindustry standards to products specified.

C. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award ofthe Contract are included under Section "Substitution Procedures."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other termsused in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure,""finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and havewell recognized meanings in the construction industry.

1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchasedfor the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product"includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similarintent.

a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name,including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer'spublished product literature, that is current as of the date of the ContractDocuments.

b. "Foreign Products", as distinguished from "domestic products," are itemssubstantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside of theUnited States and its possessions; or produced or supplied by entitiessubstantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are notcitizens of nor living within the United States and its possessions.

2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed,finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a partof the Work.

3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manuallyoperated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.


A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind,from a single source.

15017-00 01 60 00 - 1

1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannotproduce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timelymanner, consult with the Architect for a determination of the most importantproduct qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating tovisual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determinationhas been made, select products from sources that produce products that possessthese qualities, to the fullest extent possible.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting betweentwo or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatiblewith products previously selected, even if previously selected products were alsooptions.

C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprintmanufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces ofproducts which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or,where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that isnot conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item ofservice-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessiblesurface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall containthe following information and other essential operating data:

a. Name of product and manufacturer.

b. Model and serial number.

c. Capacity.

d. Speed.

e. Ratings.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deteriorationand loss, including theft.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to preventovercrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time foritems that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive todeterioration, theft and other losses.

3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container orother packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the ContractDocuments, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

15017-00 01 60 00 - 2

5. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover ina weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will notendanger the supporting construction.

7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover,in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer’sinstructions.

1.6 INTEGRITY OF FIRE, SOUND, AND WEATHERPROOF ASSEMBLIES

A. Spaces formed between fire or sound rated wall, floor, ceiling, or roof assemblies orpenetrations through such assemblies by pipe, conduit, ductwork, any other item, orvoids provided for possible use of any item shall be caulked, grouted, filled, orotherwise protected in a manner to maintain fire or sound ratings.

B. Where openings or penetrations are subject to moisture or weather, seal openings and penetrations with non-shrink grouts and elastomeric sealants intended for specific application.

1. Seal floor penetrations during construction to prevent water from flowing through building.

2. Where safing and batt insulation are used, protect from moisture. Remove damp material and install new material before enclosing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the ContractDocuments, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the timeof installation.

1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards andother devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intendeduse and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types thathave been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the ContractDocuments and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Proceduresgoverning product selection include the following:

1. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by theterm "or equal," or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract Documentprovisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamedproduct.

2. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a productor assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand

15017-00 01 60 00 - 3

or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristicsand otherwise complies with Contract requirements.

3. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications requirecompliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply withthese requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for theapplication indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied wherethe product is specified for a specific application.

a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published productliterature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.

4. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specificationsonly require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select aproduct that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.

5. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matchessatisfactorily.

a. Where no product available within the specified category matchessatisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, complywith provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" forselection of a matching product in another product category, or fornoncompliance with specified requirements.

6. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...asselected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similarphrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specifiedrequirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from theproduct line selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation ofproducts in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other Work.

1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom fromdamage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


15017-00 01 60 00 - 4

15017-00 01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution

of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Installation of the Work.

3. Cutting and patching.

4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

5. Progress cleaning.

6. Starting and adjusting.

7. Protection of installed construction.

8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for submitting surveys.

2. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected

portions of the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance

of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions

after installation of other work.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 5 days prior to the

time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building

appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will

perform patching work.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 2

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that

cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems

that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how

long services and systems will be disrupted.


Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and

patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify

Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect

before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and

patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change

their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as

intended or that will result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or

safety. Operational elements may include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Fire separation assemblies.

c. Air or smoke barriers.

d. Fire-suppression systems.

e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

f. Control systems.

g. Communication systems.

h. Conveying systems.

i. Electrical wiring systems.

j. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, reduce their

capacity to perform as intended, or that will result in increased maintenance or

decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not

limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.

c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

d. Equipment supports.

e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

f. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in

visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction

in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic

qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a

visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties

involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas

of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential

conflicts before proceeding.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's

written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent

possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and

functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework

reasonably investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities,

mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection

of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical

services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of

the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present

where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations

of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems

are to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility company that is necessary

to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other

utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities

having jurisdiction.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 4

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the

need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions

outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect

according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

D. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for

preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.

6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard

established by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading,

fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,

building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical

and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and

levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines

and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions,

name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used.

Make the log available for reference by Architect and Program Manager. Submit log at

project completion for project records.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment

and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 5

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90

inches in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing

products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging

operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated

requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of

adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located

and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not

indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,

and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not

indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to

form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not

considered hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without

delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore

surfaces to their original condition.

2. Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or

adjoining work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original

installer; comply with the original installer’s recommendations.

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 6

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption

of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in

accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Project Management and

Coordination."

E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing

services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such

services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and

similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements

retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original

Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and

with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when

not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed

surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to

be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to

prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar

operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as

invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements

specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize

evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other

finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished

area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide

an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place

floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve

uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply

primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch,

and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch.

Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 7

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-

plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure

to a weather-tight condition.

6. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.

Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished

surfaces. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or

other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed

by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction

schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a

mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due

to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Pre-installation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at pre-

installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's

work. Attend pre-installation conferences conducted by Owner's construction

personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Provide necessary daily cleaning during construction to maintain premises and

adjoining public properties free from construction waste, debris and rubbish, and

dust caused by operations.

2. At completion of each day, remove waste materials and rubbish; store tools,

equipment, machinery and surplus materials; and clean all sight exposed surfaces.

3. If Contractor fails to clean up each day and at the completion of his Work, the

Owner may do so and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. At his next pay

application a deductive change order will be processed and there is no appeal for

back charges due to clean up.

4. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials

and debris.

5. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three

days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

6. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary

for proper execution of the Work.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 8

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use

cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage

exposed surfaces.

E. Cleaning Materials: Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of the

surface to be cleaned. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning

material manufacturer.

F. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

G. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to

ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

H. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste

materials down sewers or into waterways.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection

from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary

through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable

components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, whether completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous,

damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

L. During Construction:

1. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building(s) and ground(s) are maintained free from

accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

2. Sprinkle dusty debris with water.

3. During progress of Work, clean-up site and access and dispose off waste materials,

rubbish and debris at least once every week.

4. Provide dump containers and locate on site for collection of waste materials, rubbish

and debris on a daily basis.

5. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an

unsightly or hazardous condition.

6. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from site and legally dispose off at

public or private dumping area.

7. Lower waste materials in controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do

not drop or throw materials from heights.

8. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from

cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

15017-00 01 73 00 - 9

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation

without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and

safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and

finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching

up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be

repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating

components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Project Record Documents.

3. Operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Warranties.

5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.

6. Final cleaning.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications forPayment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting FinalCompletion construction photographs and digital files.

3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirementsfor products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of SubstantialCompletion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items onthe list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, finalcertifications, and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and accessto services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similarreleases.

15017-00 01 77 00 -1

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,Final Completion construction photographs, property surveys, and similar final recordinformation.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated byOwner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner'spersonnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems.

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,construction tools, and similar elements.

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, andmaintenance.

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visualdefects.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceedwith inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will preparethe Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor ofconstruction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work hasbeen substantially completed.

2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for finalacceptance.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of FinalCompletion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "PaymentProcedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items tobe completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certifiedcopy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved foracceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurancerequirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,equipment, and systems.

15017-00 01 77 00 -2

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space andarea affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correctionincluding, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits ofconstruction.

1. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

2. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

1.6 REINSPECTION PROCEDURES

A. The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, includinginspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whosecompletion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.

1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work thatis incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for finalacceptance.

2. If necessary, if additional reinspections are required, the architect/engineer will bereimbursed at a rate of $125.00 per hour, including travel time, for all repeatedreinspections. The Contractor shall bear all costs related to such, and these costs shallbe deducted from those amounts owed the Contractor for the Work.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect ProjectRecord Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documentsfor Architect's reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of xerographic prints of Contract Drawings.

1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from thatshown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whetherindividual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-upRecord Prints. The maintenance of these documents shall be set forth in SpecificationSection 01 33 00 “Submittals”.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot bereadily identified and recorded later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

15017-00 01 77 00 -3

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markupbefore enclosing concealed installations.

d. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternatenumbers, and similar identification where applicable.

2. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORDDRAWING" in a prominent location.

C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda, contract modifications, and standard contract forms indicated below. Mark copy to indicatethe actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications,addenda, and contract modifications. The maintenance of these documents shall be set forthin Specification Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”.

1. General:

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot bereadily identified and recorded later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check themarkup before enclosing concealed installations.

d. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternatenumbers, and similar identification where applicable

2. Standard Contract Forms (reference Section “Schedule of Standard Contract Forms”):

a. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706.

b. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A.

c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707.

d. Certificate of Occupancy.

e. Health Permit.

f. List of subcontractors and major suppliers with addresses and telephone numbers.

g. Hazardous Materials Certification Statements.

h. Signed letter from Owner for receipt of all extra materials as set forth in theSpecifications.

D. Record Product Data (Shop Drawings): Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially fromthat indicated in the Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

15017-00 01 77 00 -4

3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate

numbers, and similar identification where applicable.

E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other

Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with

actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready

for continued use and reference.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Assemble one complete hard copy and one digital set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipmentnot part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individualSpecification Sections and as follows:

1. Operation Data:

a. Emergency instructions and procedures.

b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.

c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations.

d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.

e. Piping diagrams.

2. Maintenance Data:

a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.

b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.

c. Maintenance procedures.

d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.

e. Maintenance record forms.

f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.

g. Copies of maintenance service agreements.

B. Hardcopy Set: Organize operation and maintenance manuals into a suitable set of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the coversto receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.

15017-00 01 77 00 -5

C. Digital Set:

1. Organizational Structure

a. Table of Contents (TOC)

1) Each section of the TOC will be hyperlinked to the first page of each section in the body of the PDF.

b. Floor Plans

1) Each level's overall floor plan will be included in section called "Floor Plans" and will be located directly after TOC.

c. Project Warranties

d. Substantial Completion Certificates

e. Subcontrator Directory

f. Completion Lists

g. Certificate/Temporary Certificate of Occupancy

h. RFIs

i. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims (AIA G706)

j. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA G706A)

k. Consent of Surety Company to Release of Liens (G707)

l. Hazardous Materials Certification Statement(s)

m. Signed Receipt from Owner for Backstock Materials

n. Submittals

1) All O&M Data are to be broken out by specification section.

2. All Sections mentioned above to be bookmarked in descending order.

a. Bookmarked Specification sections to be named "Spec # Spec Title"

1) Example: "22 10 01 Plumbing Specialties"

1.9 WARRANTIES

A. Submittals: Submit written warranties for portions of the Work per the Specificationsand General Contractor’s one year warranty for materials and workmanship.

B. Organize two sets of warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the tableof contents of the Project Manual.

15017-00 01 77 00 -6

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leafbinders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separatewarranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typeddescription of the product or installation, including the name of the product andthe name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

1.10 ADDITIONAL ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES

A. TAS Inspection Items: If architectural services are required more than 90 calendar daysafter the date of the TDLR/TAS Inspection Report because of Contractor's delays, theContractor shall bear all costs related to such delay, and these costs shall be deductedfrom those amounts owed the Contractor for the Work.

B. All Other Items (Punch List Re-Inspections, Closeout Documents Submittals, etc.): Ifarchitectural services are required more than 60 calendar days after the date ofSubstantial Completion of the Work (as indicated on the Certificate of SubstantialCompletion) because of Contractor's delays, the Contractor shall bear all costs relatedto such delay, and these costs shall be deducted from those amounts owed theContractor for the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer orfabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentiallyhazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to complywith local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollutionregulations within work area or areas impacted by this project.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean eachsurface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning andmaintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certificationof Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by constructionactivities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material,litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and otherforeign deposits.

15017-00 01 77 00 -7

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-texturedsurface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material fromProject site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing naturalweathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their originalcondition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similarspaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polishmirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent.

k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored orthat already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical andelectrical nameplates.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, andsimilar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, andother foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stainsresulting from water exposure.

o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposedsurfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters duringconstruction.

q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, anddefective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to complywith requirements for new fixtures.

r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

15017-00 01 77 00 -8

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debrisor excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerousmaterials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose oflawfully.


15017-00 01 77 00 -9

15017-00 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and

training for products in those Sections.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and

maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training

modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual

Specification Sections.

15017-00 01 79 00 - 2

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.

Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to

master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system,

equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the

following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.

e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project record documents.

e. Identification systems.

f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

15017-00 01 79 00 - 3

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and

training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in

coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.

2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least10 days' advance notice.

15017-00 01 79 00 - 4

C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial

training use.


SECTION 01 90 00 - GENERAL ALTERATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS.


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes all alterations work to the existing building and to the site asindicated on the drawings and schedules, and as herein specified.


A. Section 01 73 00, "Execution".

B. Section 02 24 19, "Selective Demolition".

C. All sections related to work referred to herein.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data and installationinstructions for each system and component required to accomplish the alterations. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation, finishing, protection, andmaintenance.

B. Samples: Submit samples of each system and component, showing sizes, colors,textures, etc. available for Architect's selection and approval.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing quantities, locations, types, sizes andinstallation details of all systems and components.

1.5 UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS

A. In the course of alteration work, should the Contractor encounter in exposing formerlycovered existing conditions, any unforeseen structural defect, concrete, steel, masonry,etc., which could jeopardize any part of the existing building or the new work, he shallshore or otherwise support the defect and report it to the Architect who will directrepair. Additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for such work.

1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. During the construction operations, should the Contractor suspect that hazardousmaterials are present, he shall immediately cease operations and report the conditionto the Owner.

1.7 QUALITY STANDARDS

A. All work performed under this section shall be governed by the same standards andrequirements set forth for new construction, as provided for by these specifications. Refer to all applicable specification sections for specific or additional provisions.

15017-00 01 90 00 - 1

1.8 SALVAGE

A. With the exception of any salvageable items directed to be retained by the Owner, allremoved structures and materials shall become the property of the Contractor, whoshall promptly remove them from the premises.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. All materials, unless specifically indicated otherwise, shall be new. Where re-use ofexisting materials is permitted, material shall be completely refinished to condition ofnew materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Inspection of Work: The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting the conditions asthey exist and shall inspect all parts which are to be altered or remodeled, verify allmeasurements and conditions, and perform such work as may be required toaccomplish the remodeling and altering called for.

B. Removal of Furniture, Equipment, and Building Contents: The Owner's personnel willremove or relocate all loose furniture, equipment, and other contents prior to Contractorcommencing construction operations in areas to be altered.

3.2 GENERAL

A. Cut and remove all parts of existing building as shown or required to accommodate thenew work called for, joining new parts to old, or satisfactorily remodeling existing parts. Where new work is shown and specified, it shall match the old in type, color, textureand design, unless otherwise called for or shown, and shall properly join existing work. Where old work is cut or disturbed in the remodeling operation, it shall be satisfactorilypatched to match adjoining work.

B. All mechanical work shall meet or exceed the standards set forth in Divisions 21, 22,23, 26, 27, and 28 Specification Sections; all electrical work shall meet or exceed thestandards set forth in Specification Sections.

3.3 CONCRETE

A. Removal and Replacement of Existing Concrete: Where removal and replacement ofexisting concrete foundation elements is required, carefully lay out in order to minimizequantity removed. Saw cut areas to be removed, being careful to not cut, damage, orcompromise existing structural elements and existing portion to remain. New concretework shall be integrated into the existing using dowels, inserts, etc. as detailed orrequired. New surfaces shall be flush and blend with existing surfaces which remain. Comply with ACI 304, “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,and Placing Concrete”. If replacement is on grade, install underslab waterproofing orvapor barrier to match existing. Notify the Architect for inspection of preparedconditions prior to installation of concrete.

B. Concrete design mixes shall be normal weight concrete with a minimum 3000 psi, 28day compressive strength with a slump not to exceed 5".

15017-00 01 90 00 - 2

3.4 PENETRATIONS OR OPENINGS THROUGH EXISTING INTERIOR PARTITIONS

A. General, Mechanical, Electrical: Carefully cut out existing materials to size of newopenings required. If in Contractor's opinion amount of removal required weakens theremaining portion, cease operations and notify Architect. Infill around new penetrationsshall match materials and finishes of adjacent existing surfaces, except where concreteis infilled in concealed locations, do so with concrete masonry units.

B. Salvage: Salvage existing materials for use in constructing infills and extending existingexposed walls or partitions of like construction. Clean off all dirt, mortar, etc. asrequired for new work to match existing in every respect.

3.5 CLOSING EXISTING OPENINGS

A. Where doors are removed, remove existing frames, cutting back jambs, head and sillas required. Fill existing opening with materials to match existing materials, includingfinishes and textures.

B. Where existing lighting fixtures are removed, remove electrical box and patch hole flushwith plaster to match adjacent surfaces and finishes.

3.6 EXISTING SUSPENDED PANEL CEILINGS

A. Remove existing portions of ceilings as required to accommodate miscellaneousalteration work, exercising care to avoid damaging portions which are to remain. Replace or reinstall existing components as indicated.

B. Where existing panel ceilings are scheduled to remain, inspect and replace existingdamaged or soiled units with clean undamaged units of same patten, size, andapproximate color obtained from another room or space scheduled to be removed.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Refer to Specification Section 09 91 13, Painting, for schedule of existing surfaces andmaterials.

B. All existing work to be refinished shall receive minimum one (1) coat of paint, unlessadditional coats are required for coverage or are scheduled in Specification Section 0991 13, Painting.

C. Where existing walls and ceilings are patched, new openings installed, or existingopenings filled in, all new work occurring in such surface shall receive three coats ofpaint, and entire surface shall receive minimum two coats.

D. Any pitted, chipped, flaked, overly thickened or otherwise damaged existing paintedsurfaces, including water-damaged areas, etc. encountered by Contractor in areasscheduled to be painted, shall be sanded, chipped or otherwise removed to originalsurface, refinished, and repainted.

E. Verify compatibility of existing substrates with new coating scheduled.

15017-00 01 90 00 - 3

3.8 EXISTING ROOFING

A. Where existing roofing is disturbed for new or alteration work (removal of skylight, newequipment, electrical conduits, mechanical piping, etc.), rework as required to maintainwatertightness, and to ensure the integrity of roofing system.

B. Metal for non-exposed flashings (22 gauge “paint grip” galvanized) and prefinished forexposed flashing (24 gauge prefinished).

C. New roofing materials shall be compatible with or match existing materials. All roofingand flashing installation shall comply with all applicable standards of the Roofing andWaterproofing Manual of the National Roofing Contractors Association and beperformed by contractors familiar and experienced with each type of roofing repairrequired.


15017-00 01 90 00 - 4

SECTION 02 24 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unlessindicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to preventdamage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstallwhere indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed andthat are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed andreinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposedby selective demolition operations.

15017-00 02 24 19 - 1

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measuresproposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection and dust control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and endingdates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building.

D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins (if required).

E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible forrecovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and thatrecovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technicianand date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certificationprogram.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner asfar as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceedingwith selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in theWork.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.

15017-00 02 24 19 - 2

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notifyArchitect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separatecontract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect themagainst damage and weather during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain and protect from weather fire-protection facilities in service during selectivedemolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations beforebeginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolitionoperations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent ofselective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intendedfunction or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain andprotect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systemsserving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested byContractor.

15017-00 02 24 19 - 3

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, providetemporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintaincontinuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVACsystems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and capor plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with sameor compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plugremaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolishedaccording to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removaloperations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and otheradjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01 50 00"Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to preventinjury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area andto and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition ofexisting construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent waterleakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or thatare exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and coolingspecified in Section 01 50 00 "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as requiredto preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction andfinishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse ofconstruction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

15017-00 02 24 19 - 4

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by newconstruction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitationsof governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Completeselective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supportingmembers on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Usecutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering andchopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings toremain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marringexisting finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Atconcealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents ofhidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppressiondevices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials andpromptly dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoidfree fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not toimpose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soilingduring selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in theiroriginal locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Remove demolished materials from Project site.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfacesand areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device thatwill convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

15017-00 02 24 19 - 5

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selectivedemolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolitionoperations began.


15017-00 02 24 19 - 6

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural - Clay Facing Tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contractand Division 01 Specification sections.

B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufacturedproduct indicated.

C. Shop drawings for reinforcing, detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unitmasonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of ConcreteReinforcement" showing bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement ofmasonry reinforcement.

D. Samples for selection purposes of the following:

1. Unit masonry samples showing full extent of textures available for each differentexposed masonry unit required.

E. Material certificates for the following signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifyingthat each material complies with requirements.

1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout including name ofmanufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.

2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.

3. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.

4. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.


A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 "Specifications forMasonry Structures," except as otherwise indicated.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of auniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for thesecharacteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different productrequired.

15017-00 04 20 00 - 1

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of auniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from onesource or producer for each aggregate.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.

B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location toprevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes,contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place untilunits are in an air-dried condition.

C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintainedand contamination avoided.

E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulationof dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills withwaterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonrywhen construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securelyin place.

2. Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of otherwythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructedwythe and hold cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry tobe left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come incontact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coveringsspread on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products withpainted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rainfrom splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in thissection applicable to each material indicated.

15017-00 04 20 00 - 2

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

1. Structural - Clay Facing Tile:

a. Elgin Butler.

2.3 STRUCTURAL - CLAY FACING TILE

A. General:

1. Provide solid or hollow units with shape and direction of cores optional unlessotherwise indicated.

2. Where reinforced masonry is indicated, provide units designed for use inreinforced, grouted masonry; either with vertical cores and webs notched toreceive horizontal reinforcement, or with horizontal cores and with holes in bedshells for placement of grout and to receive vertical reinforcement.

3. Provide special shapes where required for corners, and other special conditionsindicated, including applications that cannot be produced by sawing standardunits.

a. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Glazed Structural - Clay Facing Tile: ASTM C 126, Grade S sized for 3/8" mortar joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Manufacturer: Elgin Butler; 365 FM 696 Elgin, Texas 78621; 512-285-3356; www.elginbutler.com.

2. Sizes: Match existing at Tarrant County Medical Examiners Office.

3. Provide Type I (single faced units) where only one finished face is exposed whenunits are installed.

4. Provide special units glazed on ends and tops, as well as faces for corners,jambs, sills, pilasters, columns, and other applications indicated, where glazedunits are exposed on other surfaces and faces.

5. Colors and Patterns:

a. 7500-M Ivory (verify match existing) (wall tile).

b. 7900 Pine (verify match existing) (base).

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Do not use masonry cement.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

15017-00 04 20 00 - 3

http://www.elginbutler.com.

C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

E. Water: Clean and potable.

F. Mortar ingredients shall have not less than 0.1 percent free alkali.

H. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compoundedfor use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performancein masonry mortars.

2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following:

1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows:

a. ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for both interior and exterior walls.

B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods andplain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated cornerand tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below:

1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage).

2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage).

C. For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:

1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16inches o.c., equal to Dur-O-Wall D/A 310 "Truss".

D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

1. AA Wire Products Co.

2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

2. Heckman Building Products, Inc.

3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleanerdesigned for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new constructionstains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring ordamaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer ofmasonry units being cleaned.

1. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consistingof a concentrated blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents.

15017-00 04 20 00 - 4

2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe used to clean unit masonry surfaces include, but are not limited to, thefollowing:

a. 202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. 200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

c. 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

d. Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.

e. Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo., Inc.

f. Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc.

2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES; FIELD PREPARED

A. General: Do not add air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellentagents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do notuse ready-mixed mortar.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar nor grout.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, mortar proportions by volume:

TYPEPORTLAND OR

BLENDED CEMENTHYDRATED LIME SAND

“N” 1 part1/2 to 1-1/4 parts(0.50) to (1.25)

See Table Below

“S” 1 part1/4 to 1/2 parts(0.25) to (.50)

See Table Below

Add the total part of cement and lime actually batched then find the minimum andmaximum parts sand allowable.

TYPETOTAL CEMENT

AND LIMEMINIMUM SAND MAXIMUM SAND

“N”

1-1/2 (1.50)1-3/4 (1.75)

2 (2.0)2-1/4 (2.25)

3-1/2 (3.50)4 (4.0)

4-1/2 4.505 (5.0)

4-1/2 (4.50)5-1/4 (5.25)

6 (6.0)6-3/4 (6.75)

“S”1-1/4 (1.25)1-1/2 (1.50)

3 (3.0)3-1/2 (3.50)

3-3/4 (3.75)4-1/2 (4.50)

Note:

1. In above, minimum and maximum proportion values are derived from ASTM C270, Table I, Proportion Specification Requirements. Lime values are incrementsof 1/4 parts taken from the allowable range. Sand values are based on aggregateratios of “not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the separatevolumes of cementitious materials.” For the purpose of positive material

15017-00 04 20 00 - 5

measurement and positive verification of material measurement, minimum sandvalues have been elevated to the next 1/4 (0.25) part.

2. Type “N” shall be used at all non-load bearing walls; Type “S” shall be used atall load-bearing and laterally-loaded walls, unless notes otherwise.

C. Mixing:

1. All dry material shall be accurately measured in a leak-proof box. Contractor shall have the option of using Mix-Rite as manufactured by Gibco (800-822-0802); VOL-CON as manufactured by Vol-Con (319-383-1856); or fabricating from a wood box for measuring dry materials. Box may be of any convenient size, but shall not be less than 12 inches x 12 inches x 12 inches inside dimensions. The use of shovels for mixing dry materials is strictly prohibited.

2. Proportion mortar accurately and mix throughly with the maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency for at least 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Keep tools and mixing equipment clean.

3. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2-1/2 hours have elapsed since initial mixing. Do not re-temper mortar.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Grout shall comply with ASTM C 476. Provide grout for bondbeams, masonry lintels, and reinforced masonry.

TYPE

PORTLANDOR

BLENDEDCEMENT

MEDIUMFINE

AGGREGATE

MAXIMUMFINE

AGGREGATE

MINIMUMCOARSE

AGGREGATE

MAXIMUMCOARSE

AGGREGATE

Fine 1 part2-1/4parts(2.25)

3 parts(3.0)

n/a n/a

Coarse 1 part2-1/4parts(2.25)

3 parts(3.0)

1 part(1.0)

2 parts(2.0)

Note: Fine aggregate is smaller than 3/8 and similar to concrete and sand. Coarseaggregate is rock between the sizes of ½" and 1/8". When placing grout in masonry,exercise extreme care to prevent grout from staining face of masonry.

E. Water-Repellant Admixtures: Proportion admixtures with other ingredients as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forinstallation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affectingperformance of unit masonry.

B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of pipingconnections prior to installation.

15017-00 04 20 00 - 6

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicatedapplicable to each type of installation included in project.

B. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the fullthickness shown, less 3/8". Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of themasonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. Afterinstallation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediatelyadjacent to the opening.

D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible.

E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed toproduce uniform blend of colors and textures.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises, donot exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet, nor ½ inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, donot exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor ½ inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignmentof head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor ½ inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets,horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor½ inch in 40 feet or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inchin 10 feet, nor 1/16 inch within width of a single unit.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion ofcolumns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed ½ inch in 20 feet, nor 3/4 inch in 40 feetor more.

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, fromdimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch nor plus ½ inch.

E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated bymore than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to ½ inch. Do notvary bed-joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8inch. Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8inch. Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than1/8 inch. Do not vary from collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inchor plus 3/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniformjoint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, andoffsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and wherepossible at other locations.

15017-00 04 20 00 - 7

B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accuratelyspaced and coordinated with other construction.

C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Unit Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bondpattern; do not use units with less that nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions atcorners or jambs.

1. Structural - Clay Facing Tile: Stack bond to match existing.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-halfrunning bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and remove loosemasonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and othersections of the specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Bed masonry units as follows:

1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.

B. All mortar joints to be uniform, dense and smooth. Cut joints flush for masonry wallsto be concealed or to be covered by other materials. All joints to be tooled as follows:

1. All Masonry Units: match existing.

C. Use all mortar within 2.5 hours of mixing. Re-temper is not approved.

3.6 CAVITIES / AIR SPACES

A. Keep cavities/air spaces clean of mortar droppings and other materials duringconstruction. Strike joints facing cavities/air spaces flush, and remove all excessmortar.

3.7 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entirelength of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exteriorside of walls, ½ inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapetwalls.

3. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wallopenings and extending 12 inches beyond opening.

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T"sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuityat returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

15017-00 04 20 00 - 8

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS WORK

A. Cooperate with other trades in installing their work in masonry. Furnish bedding mortarand set loose lintels. Cooperate in setting bucks and frames, maintain them in positionand build them in with anchors properly placed. Do not distort frames by crowding.

B. Cut and form openings for recessed items and for electrical and plumbing installationsso that wall plates and escutcheons will completely cover the openings. Cut edges shallbe clean, sharp and straight.

C. Fill solid with mortar the spaces around and behind metal door frames.

D. Point with mortar the openings around flush-mounted electrical outlet boxes.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner may employ services of an independent materials testing laboratory to performspecified inspections and testing.

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, orotherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to matchadjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence ofreplacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes,and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings, andadjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for applicationof sealants.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing toremove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry asfollows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallicscrape hoes or chisels.

2. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces as required from contact with cleaner bycovering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, orwaterproof masking type.

3. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleanerspromptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces.

5. Power washing of masonry is not allowed.

E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable toInstaller, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time ofsubstantial completion.


15017-00 04 20 00 - 9

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following metal fabrications:

1. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:

a. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in othersections.

2. Miscellaneous steel fabrications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing related terms apply to this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contractand Division 01 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for manufactured items, paint products, and grout.

C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and theirconnections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors andbolts specified for installation under other Sections.

1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain designloadings, include structural computations, material properties, and otherinformation needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by thequalified professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation.

D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested byArchitect.

E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply withrequirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article todemonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects withproject name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other informationspecified.

15017-00 05 50 00 - 1


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar tothose indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, andwith sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying theWork.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "StructuralWelding Code--Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," and AWSD1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests forwelding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.


A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to whichmetal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Showrecorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule withconstruction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guaranteedimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond toguaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completedWork, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedomfrom surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, rollermarks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:

1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated,or another weight required by structural loads.

1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Galvanized finish where detailed.

E. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.

F. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010).

15017-00 05 50 00 - 2

G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated fromcorrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposedwithin a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted bya qualified independent testing agency.

1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTMA 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers,and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.

H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for themetal alloy to be welded.

I. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material andfinish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universalmodified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664,selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finishpaint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-appliedtopcoats despite prolonged exposure.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds ingalvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight,and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, exceptcontaining no asbestos fibers.

D. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 forelectrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Selectfasteners for the type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568,Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, whereindicated, flat washers.

C. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3.

D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M).

E. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1.

F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M).

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below withcapability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed wheninstalled in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed inconcrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualifiedindependent testing agency.

15017-00 05 50 00 - 3

1. Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying withASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

I. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but notless than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work todimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabricationand support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components ofeach metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straightsharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) inambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metalassemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds andfasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due toboth solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F.

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separationor otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.

G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength andcorrosion resistance of base metals.

1. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

2. Remove welding flux immediately.

3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blendedso that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surfacematches those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealedfasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if notindicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where leastconspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place andto support indicated loads.

15017-00 05 50 00 - 4

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimizefield splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping andhandling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,screws, and similar items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, orprovide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not apart of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive otheradjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steelshapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for fieldconnection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or buildinginto masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.

a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. of typerequired to meet conditions.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL FABRICATIONS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, bars,expanded metal, of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smoothexposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices wherever possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to coordinate assembly andinstallation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding inconcrete or masonry construction.

1. Refer to details on drawings for all miscellaneous steel fabrications.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative toapplying and designing finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dipprocess complying with the following requirements:

2. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

3. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steelproducts made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, andstrip 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick or thicker.

15017-00 05 50 00 - 5

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply withminimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications andenvironmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those withgalvanized finishes or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint ApplicationSpecification No. 1" for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions,and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves and anchorbolts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate deliveryof such items to Project site.

B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleevesfrom water and concrete entry.


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners wherenecessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts,through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required forinstalling miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location,alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack;and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built intoconcrete masonry or similar construction.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connectionsthat are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shippingsize limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that havebeen hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed fieldconnections.

E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength andcorrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

15017-00 05 50 00 - 6

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blendedso that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surfacematches those adjacent.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces that will come into contact with grout,concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

G. Adjust systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as usedfor shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-paintedsurfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) minimum dry filmthickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9Section "Painting."

C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and applygalvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


15017-00 05 50 00 - 7

SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Rough carpentry work not specified elsewhere and generally intended for supportof other work.

2. Wood furring.

3. Miscellaneous blocking, grounds, nailers, and panels.

4. Construction panels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 01Specification Sections.

B. Wood treatment data from chemical treatment manufacturer. Include chemicaltreatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishingtreated material.

1. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treatedwood complies with specified requirements.

2. Warranty: Include warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each typeof treatment.


A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposureto weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack material above ground levelon uniformly spaced supports to prevent deformation.

1. For material pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers betweeneach bundle for air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American SoftwoodLumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified byAmerican Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Grade Stamps: Furnish lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp ofinspection agency that indicates grading agency, grade, species, moisture content attime of surfacing, and mill.

15017-00 06 10 53 - 1

1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces marked on ends or back of each piece.

C. Sizes: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with PS 20 except where actualsizes are specifically noted as being required.

D. Surfacing: Dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED CONDITIONS

A. Species: Any wood species listed by PS 20.

B. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture content).

C. Grade: No. 2 or standard grade.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Standards: Comply with requirements of PS 1 Voluntary Product Standard"Construction and Industrial Plywood" for veneer plywood and APA PRP-108"Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use Panels" for performance-ratedpanels.

1. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APAtrademark for grade specified.

B. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: C-C Plugged Exterior, thickness as indicated butnot less than 1/2 inch nominal.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in contact withconcrete, masonry or ground, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners witha hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Wire, Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

C. Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and flat washers.

D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.21.

E. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.

2.5 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. General: All wood, dimension lumber and construction panels, shall be fire-retardanttreated. Identify treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UnderwritersLaboratories, Inc. or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1. Dimension Lumber: Comply with AWPA C20.

a. Treatment Type: Interior Type A.

2. Construction panels: Comply with AWPA C27.

a. Treatment Type: Interior Type A.

15017-00 06 10 53 - 2

3. Inspect each piece after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of miscellaneous carpentry andin sizes that would require an excessive number or poor arrangement of joints.

B. Cut and fit miscellaneous carpentry accurately. Install members plumb and true to lineand level.

C. Coat cut edges of preservative-treated wood to comply with AWPA M4.

D. Securely fasten miscellaneous carpentry as indicated and according to applicable codesand recognized standards.

E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary toavoid splitting wood.

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS

A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work,including wall stops for doors, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, millwork, casework,visual display boards, specialties, etc. Install solid blocking between metal framing, cutand shape to required size. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nutsflush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Comply with applicable installation recommendations in APA Form E30"Design/Construction Guide--Residential & Commercial."

B. Space fasteners a minimum of 12" o.c. in field and 8" o.c. along all vertical edges.


15017-00 06 10 53 - 3

15017-00 07 84 13 - 1

SECTION 07 84 13 - FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated

construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke,

and hot gases through penetrations in, or construction joints between, fire rated wall

and floor assemblies.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:

A. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical

busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions),

horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and

partitions.

B. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.

C. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.

D. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.

E. Expansion joints in walls and floors.

F. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.

G. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.

1.4 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly

execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of

other sections, including:

1. Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants”.

2. Section 09 29 00, “Gypsum Board Assemblies”.

3. Division 21, “Fire Suppression”.

4. Division 22, “Plumbing”.

5. Division 23, “Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)”.

6. Division 26, “Electrical”.

15017-00 07 84 13 - 2

7. Division 27, “Communications”.

8. Division 28, “Electronic Safety and Security”.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through

Penetration Fire Stops"

B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops”

C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their

"FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually.

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory:

a. Firestop Devices (XHJI)

b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH)

c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)

d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)

e. Forming Materials (XHKU)

f. Joint Systems (XHBN)

g. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG)

2. Alternate Systems: “Omega Point Laboratories Directory” (updated annually).

E. Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966, “Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint

Systems”

F. Test Requirements: ASTM E 2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire

Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test

Apparatus”

G. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of

Installed Fire Stops”

H. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials”

I. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering

Judgments

J. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC.

K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

L. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

15017-00 07 84 13 - 3


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems and

fire-resistive joint systems that comply with specified requirements of tested systems.

B. Fire stop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814, UL 1479 or UL

2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being

penetrated.

C. Proposed fire stop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes

having local jurisdiction.

D. Fire stop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing

partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the

structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.

E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no qualified tested system is

available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar

qualified tested system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities

having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering

judgment documents must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop

Council.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each

material including the composition and limitations, documentation of qualified tested

firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with

Section 01 33 00.

B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and document details when

no qualified tested system is available for an application. Engineering judgment must

include both project name and contractor’s name who will install firestop system as

described in document.

C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.

1.8 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the

firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install

manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A supplier’s willingness to sell its

firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor

does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B. Installation Responsibility: assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-r

C. The work is to be installed by a contractor with at least one of the following

qualifications:

FM 4991 Approved Contractor

UL Approved Contractor

Hilti Accredited Fire Stop Specialty Contractor

D. Firm with not less than 3 years experience with fire stop installation.

15017-00 07 84 13 - 4

E. Successfully completed not less that 3 comparable scale projects using similar

systems.


A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers,

identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable.

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum

storage time at job-site.

C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with

manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.

D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material

safety data sheets as applicable.

E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.


A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation

but prior to covering or concealing of openings.

C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory

conditions before proceeding.

D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when

temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation

printed on product label and product data sheet.

E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials

from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the

substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under

conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material.

Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the

qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.

C. Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or

“post installed.” Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

15017-00 07 84 13 - 5

A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ), joint systems

(XHBN), and perimeter firestop systems (XHDG) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire

Resistance Directory; provide products of the following manufacturers as identified

below:

1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma

800-879-8000

www.us.hilti.com

2. Substitution requests shall be considered in accordance with contract

provisions.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E 814 or UL 2079 tested

for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly

type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for

each separate instance.

B. Pre-installed firestop devices for use with noncombustible and combustible pipes

(closed and open systems), conduit, and/or cable bundles penetrating concrete floors

and/or gypsum walls, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 680-P Cast-In Place Firestop Device

a. Add Aerator adaptor when used in conjunction with aerator (“sovent”)

system.

2. Hilti CP 681 Tub Box Kit for use with tub installations.

3. Hilti CP 680-M Cast-In Place Firestop Device for use with noncombustible

penetrants.

4. Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve for use with cable penetrations.

5. Hilti CFS-DID Firestop Drop-In Device for use with noncombustible and

combustible penetrants.

6. Hilti CFS-BL Firestop Block

C. Sealants, caulking materials, or foams for use with non-combustible items including

steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the

following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant

2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam

3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant

4. Hilti Firestop Silicone Sealant Gun Grade (CFS-S SIL GG)

5. Hilti Firestop Silicone Sealant Self Leveling (CFS-S SIL SL)

15017-00 07 84 13 - 6

D. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products

are acceptable:




E. Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use with fire-rated construction joints and

other gaps, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray


4. Hilti Firestop Silicone Joint Spray (CFS-SP SIL)



F. Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck and gap between

top of wall and metal profile deck; as a backer for spray material.

1. Hilti CP 777 Speed Plugs

2. Hilti CP 767 Speed Strips

G. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants

consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed,

flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable:


H. Foams, intumescent sealants, or caulking materials for use with flexible cable or cable

bundles, the following products are acceptable:






I. Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent putty or foam materials for use with flexible

cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick

2. Hilti CFS-PL Firestop Plug

15017-00 07 84 13 - 7

J. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified

nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad

2. Hilti Firestop Putty Pad (CFS-P PA)

3. Hilti Firestop Box Insert

K. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe

(closed and open piping systems), the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 643N Firestop Collar

2. Hilti CP 644 Firestop Collar

3. Hilti CP 648E/648S Wrap Strips

L. Materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate

cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in

raceways, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 637 Firestop Mortar



4. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board

M. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to

accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical

busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable:


2. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board

N. Re-penetrable, round cable management devices for use with new or existing cable

bundles penetrating gypsum or masonry walls, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti Firestop Speed Sleeve (CP 653) with integrated smoke seal fabric

membrane.

2. Hilti Firestop Sleeve (CFS-SL SK)

3. Hilti Retrofit Sleeve (CFS-SL RK) for use with existing cable bundles.

4. Hilti Gangplate (CFS-SL GP) for use with multiple cable management devices.

5. Hilti Gangplate Cap (CFS-SL GP CAP) for use at blank openings in gangplate

for future penetrations.

O. Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections

of wall and floors, the following products are acceptable:

15017-00 07 84 13 - 8

1. Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray


3. Hilti Firestop Joint Spray (CP 672 FC (FAST CURE))



P. For blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where future penetration

of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are acceptable:


2. Hilti CFS-PL Firestop Plug

Q. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814

which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

R. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079 which is

equal to the time rating of construction joint assembly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be

performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application

of materials.

2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease,

oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances

that may affect proper adhesion.

3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces

by firestopping materials.

4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity

conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.

6. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 COORDINATION

15017-00 07 84 13 - 9

A. Coordinate construction of openings, penetrations and construction joints to ensure

that the fire stop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to

accommodate through-penetration fire stop systems. Coordinate construction and

sizing of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to

specified requirements.

C. Coordinate fire stopping with other trades so that obstructions are not placed in the

way prior to the installation of the fire stop systems.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration fire stop and joint system installations that will

become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined

by the building inspector, per local building code/inspection requirements.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire

Resistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation

of through-penetration and construction joint materials.

1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water

resistant seal.

2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer

prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance

of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.

3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.


A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or

enclosing areas.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with

ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or

other recognized standard.

D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or

penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.

E. Manufacturer’s Field Services: During Installation, provide periodic destructive testing

inspections to assure proper installation/application. After installation is complete,

submit findings in writing indicating whether or not the installation of the tested

system identified was installed correctly.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION & DOCUMENTATION

15017-00 07 84 13 - 10

A. The firestop contractor is to supply documentation for each single application

addressed. This documentation is to identify each penetration and joint location on

the entire project.

A.1 The Documentation Form for through penetrations is to include:

1. A Sequential Location Number

2. The Project Name

3. Date of Installation

4. Detailed description of the penetrations location

5. Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number

6. Type of assembly penetrated

7. A detailed description of the size and type of penetrating item

8. Size of opening

9. Number of sides of assemblies addressed

10. Hourly rating to be achieved

11. Installers Name

A.2 The Documentation Form for Construction Joints is to include:

1. A Sequential Location Number

2. The Project Name

3. Date of Installation

4. Detailed description of the Construction Joints location

5. Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number

6. Type of Construction Joint

7. The Width of the Joint

8. The Lineal Footage of the Joint

9. Number of sides addressed

10. Hourly rating to be achieved

11. Installers Name

B. Copies of these documents are to be provided to the general contractor at the

completion of the project.

15017-00 07 84 13 - 11

C. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive,

preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated

construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be

visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include

the following information on labels:

1. The words: "Warning -Through Penetration Firestop System-Do Not Disturb.

Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's Name, address, and phone number.

3. Through-Penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.

4. Date of Installation.

5. Through-Penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's Name.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop

materials and soiling as work progresses.

3.7 LABOR USE TO INSTALL FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. To ensure complete harmony on the project site, the installation of each scope of work

is to be performed jurisdictionally correct per existing trade agreements.


SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealant is indicated on drawings and schedules.

B. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:

1. Interior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below:

a. Perimeter joints between interior finish materials and steel door frames.

b. Perimeter joints between interior finish materials and aluminum entrancesand storefronts.

c. Control and expansion joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonrywalls and partitions.

d. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.

e. Other joints as indicated.

C. Painters caulking or sealants is provided by in Division 09 Section "Painting".

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES

A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintainwatertight and airtight continuous seals.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, includinginstructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application.

B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samplesconsisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for eachproduct exposed to view.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within thelast 5 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of thisProject.

B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materialsfrom a single manufacturer for each different product required.

C. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test theiradhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as approved by Architect.

15017-00 07 92 00 - 1

2. Conduct field tests for each type of sealant and joint substrate.

3. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure fromtesting, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, willbe considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants which fail to adhere to jointsubstrates during testing.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labelsinforming about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration periodfor use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations toprevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under thefollowing conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limitspermitted by joint sealer manufacturers.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where jointwidths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers untilcontaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from jointsubstrates.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installation of joint sealers to coordinate with other trades to assurewatertight placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that arecompatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service andapplication, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and fieldexperience.

B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers as selected by Architect frommanufacturer's standard colors.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS (CONCEALED AND NON-PAINTED LOCATIONS)

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing,elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.

B. Multi-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS,Class 25, and uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

15017-00 07 92 00 - 2

C. One-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Type S; Grade NS; Class50; and Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealantswhich may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Multi-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT:

a. "985 NS"; Pecora Corporation.

b. "FC Parking Structure Sealant"; Dow Corning Corporation.

c. "Proglaze II"; Tremco Inc.

2. One-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT:

a. "864 NS"; Pecora Corporation.

b. "790"; Dow Corning Corporation.

c. "Spectrem 3"; Tremco Inc.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS (PAINTED LOCATIONS)

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing,elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.

B. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, anduses NT, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

C. One-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and UsesNT, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealantswhich may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT:

a. "Dynatrol II"; Pecora Corp.

b. "Sikaflex-2c NS"; Sika Corp.

c. "MasterSeal NP 2"; BASF Building Products.

d. "DYmeric"; Tremco Inc.

2. One-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT:

a. "Dynatrol 1XL"; Pecora Corp.

b. "Sikaflex-1a"; Sika Corp.

c. "MasterSeal NP 1"; BASF Building Products.

15017-00 07 92 00 - 3

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; arecompatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and areapproved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experienceand laboratory testing.

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextrudingstrips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent towater and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwisecontribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealantmanufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materialsor joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type whichare acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which arenot harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leaveoily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-serviceperformance.

B. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealantsand to surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliancewith requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditionsaffecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers untilunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealersto comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the followingrequirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere withadhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protectivecoatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealantmanufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents;water; surface dirt; and frost.

2. Clean concrete, masonry, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, bybrushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of thesemethods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimumbond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaningoperations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.

15017-00 07 92 00 - 4

4. Clean metal and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other meanswhich are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering withadhesion of joint sealers.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by jointsealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or priorexperience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration ontoadjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant withadjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by suchcontact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tapeimmediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructionsapplicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringentrequirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for useof joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.

C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the followingrequirements:

1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants duringapplication and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes anddepths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealantmovement capability.

a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.

b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.

c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealantapplication and replace with dry material.

2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals,or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints wouldresult in sealant failure.

3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply withrequirements indicated above for joint fillers.

D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealantsdirectly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recessesprovided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes anddepths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to timeskinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configurationindicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant withsides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not usetooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved bysealant manufacturer.

15017-00 07 92 00 - 5

1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unlessotherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses bymethods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and ofproducts in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminatingsubstances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes sothat they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damagedor deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to producejoint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.


15017-00 07 92 00 - 6

SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes access doors for installation in the following types ofconstruction:

1. Gypsum drywall.

2. Masonry.

B. Provide stainless steel access doors where indicated.

C. Provide fire-rated access doors and frames in rated partitions.

D. Building-in of anchors and grouting of frames set in masonry construction is specifiedin Division 04.

E. Refer to Division 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 sections for access doors furnished byMechanical and Electrical Contractors.

F. Where access doors are required and are not provided by any other source, they willbe furnished by the requirements of this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data in form of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructionsfor each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates,instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage, devices.

a. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, walland ceiling construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions, andother data pertinent to installation.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project from one sourcefrom a single manufacturer.

B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be built into other workfor installation of access doors. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

C. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per approved testing methods and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

15017-00 08 31 13 - 1


A. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors from tradesrequiring access to concealed equipment, and indicate on submittal schedule.

B. Special-Size Access Doors: Use where required or requested; indicate on schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering access doors that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

1. J.L. Industries

2. Karp Associates, Inc.

3. Milcor, Inc.

4. Bilco Company

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit,complete with all parts, and ready for installation.

B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steelconstruction unless otherwise indicated, 12" x 12" minimum size. Grind welds smoothand flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of typerequired to secure access panels to types of support shown.

C. Frames: Fabricate from 16-gage steel.

D. Frames in Restrooms, Toilets, Exam Rooms, or Other Areas Where Water is Present: Fabricate from 16-gage, #4 satin-finished stainless steel.

E. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1-inch wide around perimeter of frame.

F. For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal anchors.

G. Flush Panel Doors and Frames: Fabricate from not less than 14-gage sheet steel, withconcealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees. Finish with manufacturer'sfactory-applied prime paint.

H. Flush Panel Doors and Frames in Toilets, Restrooms or Other Areas Where Water isPresent: Fabricate from not less than 14-gage stainless steel sheet, with concealedpiano hinge set to open 175 degrees. Buff exposed surfaces to #4 satin finish.

I. Flush Fire-Rated Doors and Frames: Fabricated from materials at locations indicated above (prime steel or stainless steel) with automatic spring-type closer and automatic self-latching operation. Fire rating as required by partition which installed.

J. Provide one cylinder lock per access door. Furnish 2 keys per lock. Key all locks alike,unless otherwise scheduled.

15017-00 08 31 13 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors.

B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades.

C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panelsplumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


15017-00 08 31 13 - 3

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans for locations of full height interior partitions.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.

2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing and furring members.

3. Installation of access panels.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to thissection:

1. Division 09 Section "Painting" for finishing of exposed gypsum board assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 fordefinitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this sectionor other referenced standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified, including test datato certify compliance of metal framing components and exterior metal framing systemwith specified requirements.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies areindicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblieswhose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by UnderwritersLaboratories.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain steel framing members and each type of gypsumboard and other panel products from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name andidentification of manufacturer or supplier.

15017-00 09 29 00 - 1

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damagefrom weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic andother causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging, elevated minimum1-1/2" above floor.

C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bendor otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.


A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditionsfor application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and withgypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board toframing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C), nor more than 95 degree F (35 degC) when using temporary heat sources.

C. Ventilate building spaces to remove excessive moisture. Avoid hot, dry drafts toprevent materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Dale Industries, Inc.

b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

c. Unimast, Inc.

d. USG Industries.

e. Dietrich.

2. Grid Suspension Systems:

a. Chicago Metallic Corp.

b. National Rolling Mills Co.

c. USG Interiors, Inc.

3. All Other Gypsum Board and Related Products:

a. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

4. Drywall Moldings:

a. Fry Reglet.

15017-00 09 29 00 - 2

2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. General: Provide components which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes,unless otherwise indicated.

B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable forapplication indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or otheraccessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability tosustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction,as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

D. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 25 gauge minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and7/16 inch wide flanges, electro galvanized, and as follows:

1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwiseindicated.

E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, andminimum 25 gauge thickness of base (uncoated) metal.

F. Grid Suspension System: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard grid suspensionsystem composed of 25 gauge main beams and cross furring members which interlockto form a modular supporting network. All members to have painted finish.

2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING FOR INTERIOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Steel Studs and Runners, Except where noted as cold-formed metal framing: ASTMC 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16"minimum lip (return), with ASTM A525 G40 galvanized coating, and complying withthe following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and fordepth:

1. Refer to drawings for depth; 25 gauge unless otherwise indicated below, detailedor recommended by stud manufacturer for unbraced stud height.

a) Bottom runner, 20 gauge.

b) All unbraced partitions, where gypsum board is installed on one sideof studs ONLY, 20 gauge (chase walls with gypsum boarddiaphrams are considered braced; partitions at expansion joints arenot considered braced).

c) All unbraced partitions, exceeding 12-feet in unbraced height shallbe minimum 20 gauge in accordance with manufacturer’s stud spanrecommendations.

d) Studs at openings exceeding 4-feet in width shall have stud gaugeincreased to 20 gauge.

e) Studs with wet wall and shower tile backer units (cement board)shall be minimum 20 gauge.

f) 2-1/2" studs, 20 gauge.

15017-00 09 29 00 - 3

g) Studs with upper cabinets shall be minimum 20 gauge.

h) All 3" deep leg runner track to be minimum 20 gauge.

B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, 7/8" depth and 25 gaugeminimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal.

C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding powerand other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely tosubstrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywallmanufacturers for applications indicated.

1. Type S-12, buglehead screws, 1" and 1-1/4" self-drilling type, cadmium or zincplated.

2.4 GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Provide mold, mildew, moisture resistant paper and core gypsum board indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints, 5/8" thick unlessdetailed otherwise.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396, and as follows:

1. Water Resistant Type:

a. Type: Type X.

b. Edges: Tapered.

c. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, productswhich may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, thefollowing:

1) "XP Gypsum Board with Sporgard"; Gold Bond Building ProductsDiv., National Gypsum Co.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim andcontrol joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:

1. Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement:

a. Sheet steel coated with zinc by hot-dip or electrolytic processes, or withaluminum.

B. One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047,with slot opening covered with removable strip, equal to USG No. 093.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply withreferenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsumboard.

15017-00 09 29 00 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollowmetal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, forcompliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affectingperformance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation untilunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and forsupport of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, handrails, grab bars, toiletaccessories, visual display boards, furnishings, etc., and similar construction to complywith details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or ifnone available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United StatesGypsum Co.

C. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furringmembers; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members oras indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible.

1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs.

2. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck.

B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.

C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits.

D. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.

E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but notless than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.

1. Wire Hangers: 8 gauge, galvanized, 4 ft. on center.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2 inch, 4 ft. on center, and within 6" ofparallel partitions.

3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on center; unless notedotherwise.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so thatcross furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12ft. as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallelmembers.

G. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspensionsystem meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross furringmembers to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

15017-00 09 29 00 - 5

H. Install resilient isolation system hangers in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural elements where gypsum drywallstud system abuts other construction, and anchor with approved power drivenfasteners spaced 24" o.c. Where bottom track rests on top of a masonry partition,fasten into masonry bond beam spaced 12" so.c. Locate top track as follows:

1. Interior Partitions Scheduled to Extend to Structure: Locate top track to bottomof framing, bolted or anchored to structure with approved power driven fastenersspaced not more than 24" o.c.

2. All Other Interior Partitions: Align top track 4" above highest scheduled ceilingheight where partition occurs. Brace all track to building framing members at48" o.c., staggered where possible, utilizing metal stud sections screwed to trackand screwed or anchored to building structure with power driven fasteners. Intersecting partitions may be braced to each other with a diagonal brace acrosshead tracks located maximum 48" from intersection.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fasteningsurface does not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing.

C. Position all studs vertically in the runners. Anchor studs to bottom and top track asfollows:

1. Partitions scheduled to extend to structure: Anchor each stud at top track andbottom track.

2. Slip joint - Where studs are confined vertically by structural elements or otherfixed building components at both top and bottom, use long leg runner for toptrack, hold top of studs minimum 1" below top of runner, and secure each studto top runner with a single screw.

3. All Other Interior Partitions: Screw attachment of stud to track is not required,except at corners, door or window openings, partition intersections, etc.

D. Locate studs no more than 2" from all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partitioncorners, and other construction. Install double studs at all door or window jambs andat leading edge of all wingwalls. Frame head and sill of openings through partitionswith cut to length section of track, screw attached through overlapping flanges intoadjacent studs.

E. Install steel studs and furring at not more than 16 inches on center.

F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards canbe installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange.

3.5 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board tocomply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, andstagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.

15017-00 09 29 00 - 6

C. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number ofend-butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Staggerend joints at least 24 inches.

D. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt jointsor avoids them entirely where possible. At high walls, install boards horizontally withend joints staggered over studs.

E. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damagedor damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with notmore than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.

F. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications whereintermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges andmill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Stagger vertical joints overdifferent studs on opposite sides of partitions.

G. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additionalsupport at openings and cutouts.

3.6 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION

A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board to abut wall/partition board application to thegreatest extent possible.

2. On partitions/walls 12'-0" or less in height, apply gypsum board vertically(parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths whichwill minimize end joints.

3. In restrooms, kitchens, custodian closets (at mop sinks) or other locations wherewater is present, install water-resistant gypsum board.

4. In all other areas, install standard gypsum board.

5. All gypsum board to have tapered edges to produce a flat surface.

6. Space fasteners 12" o.c. in field and 8" o.c. staggered along all vertical edges.

B. Drive screws with an electric screw driver and provide a slight depression with screwheads below the surface of the wall board. Do not drive fasteners closer than 3/8"from edges of the board.

C. Construct all chase walls following implicitly the recommended approved proceduresof the United States Gypsum Company, supplemented by the details on the drawings. Gypsum board diaphragms shall be no closer to floor than 60".

3.7 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Install trim as directed and as required. Where feasible, use the samefasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to thesupports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor all trim by screw attachment to steel framing to prevent displacement.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install metal edge trim where interior partitions abutt exterior walls. Connect edgingto interior partition only.

15017-00 09 29 00 - 7

D. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposedor semi-exposed, except at floor. Provide type with face flange to receive jointcompound except where "U" bead (semi-finishing type) is indicated.

1. Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to otherconstruction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.

2. Install "LK" bead where substrate is kerfed to receive long flange of trim.

3. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board isinstalled.

4. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled(including expansion joints).

E. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locationsrequired by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved bythe Architect for visual effect. In addition, install control joints in walls which are inexcess of 30' in length without penetrations at locations approved by Architect.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, whichensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time ofSubstantial Completion.


15017-00 09 29 00 - 8

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Porcelain tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Samples for selection purposes consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing fullrange of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tileindicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection.


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type,composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide productsof consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progressof the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfullycompleted tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated forProject.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken andlabels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labelingsealed tile packages.

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, andother causes.


A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation tocomply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.

B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxidebuildup.

C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installationand for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referencedinstallation standard or manufacturer's instructions.

15017-00 09 30 00 - 1

1.7 ATTIC STOCK

A. Furnish attic stock materials that match products installed as described below,packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearlydescribing contents.

1. Provide minimum 10% of each type, color and size specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, the following:

1. Porcelain Tile

a. Crossville, Inc.

2. Tile Mortar:

a. Custom Building Products

3. Tile Epoxy Grout:

a. Custom Building Products.

4. Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane:

a. Custom Building Products.

5. Tile Trims:

a. Schlüter Systems. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American NationalStandard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tileindicated.

1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicatedfor tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures,patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materialscomplying with the following requirements:

1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standardcolors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated.

2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.

15017-00 09 30 00 - 2

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Field Tile: Crossville, EcoCycle Americana, 12" x 12" size, AV114, “Grand Canyon”(Porcelain).

B. Accent Tile: Crossville, Color Blox, 12" x 12" size, A1119, “Night Night”.

C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and tocomply with the following requirements:

1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tilewhere applicable.

2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.

b. External Corners for Thinset Installations: Surface bullnose.

c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except use coved base andcap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.

3. Metal Tile Trims: Provide stainless steel trim at intersections of tile and adjacentflooring equal to Schlüter Systems “Schiene”, “Reno-U”, “DECO”, and “Reno-Ramp”, heights and type as required, scheduled, and detailed on drawings.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Modified Dry Set Mortar:

1. MegaLite Ultimate Crack Prevention Large Format Tile Mortar, Custom BuildingProducts.

2. ProLite Premium Large Format Tile Mortar, Custom Building Products.

2.5 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. 2-Part Epoxy Grout:

1. CEG-IG, 100% Solids Industrial Grade Epoxy Grout, color as Selected byArchitect, Custom Building Products.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS FOR EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants ofbase polymer indicated that comply with requirements of Division 07 Section "JointSealants," including ASTM C 920 as referenced by Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoiningsealed joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G,A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated withfungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substratesthat are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes.

15017-00 09 30 00 - 3

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards andmanufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additivecontent; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixingtime, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform qualitywith optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

2.8 ANTI-FRACTURE MEMBRANE

A. Furnish and install anti-fracture crack suppression under all tile flooring and baseequal to RedGuard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane, Custom BuildingProducts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, forcompliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditionsaffecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil orwaxy films and curing compounds.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical andmechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has beencompleted before installing tile.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected duringsample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packagedaccordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colorsas those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factoryblended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tileinstallation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications forthe Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materialsand methods indicated.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; complywith TCA installation methods indicated.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form acomplete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminatework neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or jointalignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tilewithout marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets,piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

15017-00 09 30 00 - 4

E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints whenadjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work andcenter tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust tominimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or as required for proper alignment.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, includingcontrol, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated on the drawings and inaccordance with TCA recommendations. Do not saw cut joints after installation oftiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

2. Locate control joints at all interior corners by omitting grout and installingsealant to match grout.

3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards:

1. For ceramic tile grouts, comply with ANSI A108.10.

3.4 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. All materials and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the currentlyaccepted installation practices of the Domestic Tile Industry, published by the TileCouncil of America, Inc. Other installation specifications, as issued by themanufacturer of the setting material or as indicated herein shall be implicitlyfollowed. Refer to other sections of specifications for preparation of walls orsurfaces to receive tile.

B. Floors (Tile 12" x 12" or larger): Tile Council Installation Method F 113. MediumMortar Bed, with back buttering of each tile to achieve 100% coverage and to allowcomplete leveling of tile.

C. Expansion Joints In Tile Surfaces: Tile Council Installation Method EJ 171.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tilesurfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tileand grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 daysafter installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbingfixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water beforeand after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coatingmanufacturer that is acceptable to grout manufacturer. Trap and removecoating to prevent it from clogging drains.

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

15017-00 09 30 00 - 5

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable tomanufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deteriorationat time of Substantial Completion.

1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days aftergrouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner fromtile surfaces.


15017-00 09 30 00 - 6

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes panel ceilings installed with exposed suspension systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data for each type of product specified.

2. Samples for selection purposes consisting of actual panel units or sections ofpanel and grid units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns availablefor each type of unit indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfullycompleted acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicatedfor Project.

B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide ceilings that are identical to those tested forthe following fire-performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below,by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction. Identify ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testingand inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 andcomplying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of ceiling unit from asingle source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearanceand physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspensionsystem from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent qualityin appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling units and suspensionsystem components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported bythem, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components(if any), and partition system (if any).

15017-00 09 51 13 - 1


A. Deliver ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in afully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, directsunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilizedmoisture content.

C. Handle ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior ceilings until space is enclosed andweatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilingsis complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuouslymaintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that matchproducts installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identifiedwith appropriate labels.

1. Ceiling Panels:

a. ACP-1: Furnish Two (2) unopened cartons.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acoustical Panel Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products whichmay be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ACP-1: “Clean Room FL”, Armstrong World Industries, Inc., No. 1715, 2' x 2'x 3/4" size.

B. Available Grid Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Standards for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metalsuspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated thatcomply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.

B. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 gage.

C. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicatedor, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations thatfit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated.

15017-00 09 51 13 - 2

D. Depth:

1. Main Beams and 4' Cross Tees: 1-1/2" minimum.

2. 2' Cross Tees: 1-1/8" minimum.

2.3 DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Wide-Face Capped Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross-runnersroll-formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, withprefinished metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows:

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty System.

2. End Condition of Cross-Runners: Override (stepped) type.

3. Cap Material and Finish: Steel sheet painted to match color of acoustical unit.

4. Face Width: 15/16 inch, equal to Armstrong “Prelude Plus XL, Aluminum”,“White”.

5. Fire-Resistance-Rating: Non-fire-resistance-rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and othersections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed withinstallation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of ceiling units to balance border widthsat opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half-width units at borders,and comply with reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below,per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C636.

B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units in a manner shown byreflected ceiling plans.

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objectswithin ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceilingsuspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions andoffset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equallyeffective means.

15017-00 09 51 13 - 3

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produceshanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings requiredto support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspensionmembers and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Sizesupplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads withinperformance limits established by referenced standards.

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or toinserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are secure and appropriate forsubstrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwisefail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

5. Space hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along each member supported directlyfrom hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8inches from ends of each member.

D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of ceiling area and where necessaryto conceal edges of ceiling units.

E. Install ceiling panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed bysupport of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders andat penetrations.

1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas where required by governingregulations, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panelmanufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required.

F. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspensionmembers. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minorfinish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned andrepaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


15017-00 09 51 13 - 4

SECTION 09 91 13 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed new andexisting interior items and surfaces as selected.

B. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in additionto shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections.

C. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not designated in "schedules," except where asurface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain unfinished. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similaradjacent materials or surfaces. If finish is not designated, the Architect will select fromstandard colors or finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting exposed pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steeland iron work, gas piping above roof, and primed metal surfaces of mechanicaland electrical equipment.

2. Painting includes field painting of all vent pipes, fan units, and other itemslocated on or above roof.

D. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealedsurfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items not to be painted or finished include the following:

a. Toilet enclosures.

b. Acoustic/tackable materials.

c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

d. Light fixtures.

e. Anodized aluminum.

f. Stainless steel.

g. Chromium plate.

h. Finish hardware, except where primed for painted finish.

i. All glass, plastics, etc.

j. Plastic laminate.

k. Prefinished metal panels.

l. Exposed brick.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 1

m. Prefinished, premanufactured millwork.

n. Exposed batt insulation.

o. Copper flashings, gutters, downspouts, etc.

2. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or othercode-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, ornomenclature plates.

E. Painting work includes gypsum board treatment.

F. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to thissection:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and applicationinstructions for each material proposed for use.

1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system andapplication as scheduled. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalognumber and general classification.

B. Samples of gypsum board texture for approval.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by thesame manufacturer as the finish coats.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensurecompatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnishinformation on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified.

C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material ofthe various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displayingmanufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.


A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages andcontainers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 2

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at aminimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in aclean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags andwaste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areasare protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, andapplication.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted andsurrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted andsurrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to dampor wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to bepainted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by themanufacturer during application and drying periods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated in the work are as follows:

1. The Sherwin-Williams Company (SW). 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD WALL TREATMENT MATERIAL

A. Laminating Adhesive: United States Gypsum, or equal, Perf-A-Tape joint compound.

B. Tape: Perf-A-Tape joint system.

C. Texture: Perf-A-Tape gypsum texture.

2.3 SEALANTS

A. One-Part, Non-Sag, Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound: Pecora Corporation AC-20+Silicone.

2.4 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES FOR NEW SURFACES

A. General: All materials shall be products and manufacturers as scheduled, no equal. Where more than one product is listed, it is the Contractor's option as to which productto use.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 3

B. New Interior Surfaces:

1. All Gypsum Board Friezes, Ceilings, Fabrications, and Furrings Shall be SprayApplied Gypsum "Orange Peel" Textured or Rolled Textured as selected byArchitect and Given:

SW: 1 coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, and2 or more coats Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 Series.

2.5 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES FOR EXISTING SURFACES

A. General: All materials shall be products and manufacturers as scheduled, no equal. Where more than one product is listed, it is the Contractor's option as to which productto use.

B. Existing Interior Surfaces:

1. All Existing Gypsum Board Walls Shall be Spray Applied Gypsum "Orange Peel"Textured or Rolled Textured as selected by Architect and Given:

SW: 1 coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, and2 or more coats Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Semi-Gloss, B70/B60V25Series.

2. All Existing Gypsum Board Ceilings, and Furrings Shall be Given:

SW: 1 or more coats Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed forcompliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint applicationuntil unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces andconditions within a particular area.

B. Secure color schedules for items before applying paint or finish.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machinedsurfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, orprovide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Removethese items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have itemsreinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil andgrease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and othercontaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly paintedsurfaces.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 4

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry units, and cementplaster, to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, andrelease agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealershave been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surfacepreparation.

2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to viewsmooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of whiteshellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty orplastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Primeedges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets,counters, cases, and paneling.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.

d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavycoat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.

3. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not beenshop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreignsubstances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply withrecommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council.

a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatmentwash coat before priming.

b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have beendamaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paintmanufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum-basedsolvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Removepretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock bymechanical methods.

5. Gypsum Board: All gypsum board shall receive joint treatment. Joints, screwheads and depressions shall be treated with tape and joint compound inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions. All coats of compound shall besanded prior to subsequent application. The final coat shall leave the surfacewithout pronounced rises, ready to receive texture or wall finish.

a. Gypsum Board Finish Levels:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and whereindicated.

2. Level 4: At all exposed areas except as noted below.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 5

3. Level 5: At all curved or radiused walls and ceilings.

C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance withmanufacturer's directions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir asrequired during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove filmand, if necessary, strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only withinrecommended limits.

D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coatwhere multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match thecolor of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats todistinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and othersurfaces receiving texture finishes according to texture finish manufacturer'sinstructions. Apply primer only to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfacesindicated to receive texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray equipment acceptable to texture finish manufacturer, produce auniform texture matching approved field samples and free of starved spots or otherevidence of thin application or of application patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receivetexture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediatelyremove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish manufacturer toprevent damage.

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, thatensures completed gypsum board surfaces remain without damage or deterioration attime of Substantial Completion.

3.4 APPLICATION OF FINISHES

A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators andtechniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditionsdetrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

1. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

2. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of theapplication method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat hascured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications wheresanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with themanufacturer's directions.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 6

3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions showthrough final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, andappearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges,corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thicknessequivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-infixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similarcomponents are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintainthe system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.

6. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

7. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted.

8. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with aflat, nonspecular black paint.

9. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to matchexposed surfaces.

10. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework tomatch exterior.

C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated,or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and beforesubsequent surface deterioration.

1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do notrecoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feelsticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat ofpaint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.

D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or otherapplicators according to the manufacturer's directions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool asrecommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommendedby the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer'srecommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire systemas recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited toitems exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 7

H. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material asrecommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finishedand has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces whereevidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coatwith no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

I. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leaveno evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surfaceimperfections.

J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surfaceof uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not beacceptable.

K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface filmof even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brushmarks, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

3.5 SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Install sealants per manufacturer’s written instructions and approved shop drawings.


A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time andas often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:

1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to samplethe paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project willbe taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.

2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristicsas required by the Owner:

a. Quantitative materials analysis.

b. Abrasion resistance.

c. Apparent reflectivity.

d. Flexibility.

e. Washability.

f. Absorption.

g. Accelerated weathering.

h. Dry opacity.

i. Accelerated yellowness.

j. Recoating.

15017-00 09 91 13 - 8

k. Skinning.

l. Color retention.

m. Alkali and mildew resistance.

3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specifiedrequirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, removenoncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint,and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repaintingwith specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and otherdiscarded paint materials from the site.

B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Removespattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacentfinished surfaces.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable toArchitect.

B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporaryprotective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completionof painting operations.

1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restoredamaged or defaced painted surfaces.


15017-00 09 91 13 - 9

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 1

SECTION 12 35 53.13 - METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Stainless Steel Casework and work surfaces, to match existing.


A. Related Work To Be Performed By Others:

1. Concrete pedestal below base cabinets

2. Tile base below base cabinets

3. Final connection to electrical raceway attached to laboratory casework or furniture.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. SEFA 8: Laboratory Furniture – Casework, Shelving and Tables GuidelinesScience Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA)

B. ISO 9001:2000 – Quality ManagementInternational Standards Organization (ISO)

C. ADA (ATBCB ADAAG) Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility GuidelinesAmericans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Drawings shall include data and details for construction of the laboratory casework as well as information regarding the name, quantity, type and construction of materials (such as hardware, gauges, etc), that will be used to complete the project.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. The laboratory casework manufacturer shall furnish shop drawings illustrating the layout and placement of all laboratory casework as well as any products included in this section.

2. Indicate the type and location of all electrical fittings and associated connections.

3. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 2

5. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples:

Submit the following (if requested by Architect):

1. One (1) 24” wide, full-height base cabinet: Construction to consist of one (1) drawer, one (1) door, one (1) cupboard with adjustable half/full depth shelf and related hardware (pulls, hinges, drawer slides, etc.), complete with finish.

2. One set of SS finish options representing the manufacturer’s full range of available finishes. Minimum sample size 2 inches by 3 inches.

3. One Countertop backsplash and finished edge.

D. Quality Assurance/Control

1. Design Data/Test Reports: Manufacturer shall submit test data and design criteria which are in compliance with the project specifications.

2. Certificates: All certifications required in the specifications shall be submitted with the original submittal package under separate cover. Certificates must be provided with the signature of a qualified individual of the supplier.

3. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s instructions for installation and maintenance of all products provided and installed within this section. Instructions will be in bound form, tabbed and organized by section number.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packaging, Shipping, Handling and Unloading

1. Packaging: Products shall have packaging adequate enough to protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during shipping, delivery and installation.

2. Delivery: Casework delivery shall only take place after painting, utility rough-ins and related activities are completed that could otherwise damage, soil or deteriorate casework in installation areas.

3. Handling: Care, such as the use of proper moving equipment, experienced movers, etc., shall be used at all times to avoid damaging the casework. Until installation takes place, any wrapping, insulation or other method of protection applied to products from the factory will be left in place to avoid accidental damage.

B. Acceptance at Site: Casework will not be delivered or installed until the conditions specified under Part 3, Installation section of this document have been met.

C. Storage: Casework shall be stored in the area of installation. If, prior to installation, it is necessary for casework to be temporarily stored in an area other than the installation area, the environmental conditions shall meet the environmental requirements specified under the Project Site Conditions article of this section.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 3

D. Waste Management and Disposal: The supplier of the laboratory casework is responsible for removing any waste or refuse resulting from the installation of, or work pertaining to laboratory casework; thereby leaving the project site clean and free of debris. Trash container(s) to be provided by others.

1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. An operational HVAC system that maintains temperature and humidity at occupancy levels must be in place;

B. Adjacent and related work shall be complete;

C. Ceiling, overhead ductwork and lighting must be installed;

D. Site must be free of any further construction such as “wet work”;

E. Required backing and reinforcements must be installed accurately and the project must be ready for casework installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Furnish a written warranty that Work performed under this Section shall remain free from defects as to materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. Defects in materials and workmanship that may develop within this time are to be replaced without cost or expense to the Owner.

Defects include, but are not limited to:

1. Ruptured, cracked, or stained coating

2. Discoloration or lack of finish integrity

3. Cracking or peeling of finish

4. Slippage, shift, or failure of attachment to wall, floor, or ceiling

5. Weld or structural failure

6. Warping or unloaded deflection of components

7. Failure of hardware

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers (equal to the following): Mott Manufacturing Ltd.; 452 Hardy Rd. Brantford, ON, Canada N3T 5L8. Tel: (519) 752-7825. Fax: (519) 752-2895. Email: [email protected], www.mott.ca.

B. Requests for Substitutions: All requests will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 25 00, “Substitution Procedures”.

mailto:inquire@

http://www.mott.ca/

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 4

2.2 CASEWORK MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel:

1. Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304 or 316 alloy.

2. Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, AISI No. 4 Brushed Finish

B. Glass: Laminated Glass: CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Type 1 with clear PVB interlayer. Total nominal thickness of laminated glass: 6 mm.

C. Sealant: One component, RTV silicone sealant. Color to suit application.

2.3 CASEWORK CONSTRUCTION

A. Materials and Thickness: Use the following minimum steel thicknesses for furniture manufacturing:

1. 3mm (11 Ga) leveling bolt gusset plates.

2. 1.9mm (14 Ga) drawer slides and side suspension channels.

3. 1.5mm (16 Ga) for tubular rails, legs for tables, gusset plates, cabinet top and intermediate horizontal rails.

4. 1.2mm (18 Ga) for door and drawer fronts, cabinet floor, cabinet sides, vertical front members, cabinet toe kick, service cover panels, table and kneehole frames, front rails, gable legs and dust caps, false panels, furring and filler panels.

5. 0.9mm (20 Ga) for drawer backs, door backs, vertical closure channel, removable back panels, shelves, drawer bodies, drawer dividers, bin bodies, and pull-out shelves.

B. Cabinet Frame:

1. Provide one-piece die-formed cabinet bottom construction with return side flanges turned down. Spot weld flanges to cabinet sides.

2. Cabinet bottoms shall be turned down at front to form 32mm (1-1/4”) “U” channel to accept toe kick and turn down 133mm (5-1/4”) at back with 16mm (5/8”) return to form the back lower member of cabinet base. Provide punched 19mm (3/4”) dia. corner holes for access to levelers and to accept PVC press plugs. It shall be possible to access levelers from above cabinet without removing drawers or drawer supports.

2. Provide additional vertical 75mm (3”) “HAT” shaped channels, spot-welded to or formed with the rear vertical corner. Channel shall be provided with pre-punched holes to receive shelf clips, and slotted holes to receive drawer suspension tracks. Cabinets 762mm (30”) wide and larger shall be provided with intermediate 117mm (4-5/8”) “HAT” channels to brace cabinet and accept shelf clips and drawer tracks.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 5

3. Where applicable, the front corner posts shall be pre-punched and slotted to accept drawer suspension systems and suspension pull-out shelves. Front vertical posts shall form inboard flush front construction for doors and drawers acting as the cabinet main member side gable tying the cabinet bottom and horizontal member together to form a rigid case. Front post rear closure channels shall be “J” shaped 9mm (11/32”) x 33mm (1-5/16”) x 49mm (1-15/16”). Provide channel with pre-punched holes to receive shelf clips.

4. Doors and drawers shall overlay top intermediates and floor horizontal members.

5. Top horizontal front framing member shall form a “J” shaped section 75mm (3”) wide, 10mm (3/8”) return by 25mm (1”) deep with 16mm (5/8”) return.

6. Intermediate horizontal framing members shall form a “U” 32mm (1-1/4”) high with a 25mm (1”) return on top and 16mm (5/8”) return on bottom.

7. Top rear horizontal framing member shall be 50mm (2”) x 32mm (1-1/4”) angle section welded to back corner lapped post and side gables with welded corner gusset plates acting as cabinet bracing and counter top material fixing member.

8. Bottom of cabinet will rest on a concrete pedestal. Bottom of cabinet shall key up into “U” shaped front floor member and act as reinforcement. Front floor of cabinet and corner post sections shall be spot welded together forming one structural member.

9. Side gable returns and back lower member shall form all welded structural corner to accept leveller gussets and 10mm (3/8”) levelling bolts.

10. Cabinet construction shall be electro spot-welded to form a strong well-fitted, one-piece unit.

11. Exposed horizontal structural cabinet members between doors and drawers shall be unacceptable.

C. Cabinet Hardware:

1. Pulls: Provide handles for drawers and hinged doors in 100mm (4”) satin finish stainless steel.

2. Door Hinges: Provide five knuckle-type barrel door hinges of 1.9mm (14 Ga) steel screwed into door and fastened to cabinet side stile with two counter sunk #8-32 zinc plated machine screws & captive serrated tooth washer nuts. Standard hinge finish shall be bright chrome.

C. Base Cabinet Components:

1. Provide removable back panels for cupboard base cabinets and at back side of knee spaces.

2. Shelving edges; turned down on all four sides 25mm (1”), and returned under on front and back 25mm (1”). Shelves 914mm (36”) and longer shall be provided with “HAT’ channel reinforcement at front edge.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 6

3. Doors:

a. Fabricate doors of 2 telescoping metal panels, 19mm (3/4”) thick, painted internally with a sound-deadening material extending continuously full-width, and top to bottom. Reinforce hinged side of door adequately with hinge machine screws to prevent sagging. Secure recessed hinges to cabinet posts with machine screws and concealed self-locking nuts. Provide nylon roller friction catches, mounted on horizontal top or intermediate members pull side of doors. Provide each hinged door with 2 rubber bumpers.

b. Doors, drawers, tracks and back panels shall be replaceable in the field without requiring special tools.

c. All standard double door cabinets shall be designed without center stiles to maximize access to the cabinet.

4. Drawers:

a. Fabricate drawer fronts of 2 telescoping metal panels painted internally, and totally filled with sound-deadening material to eliminate possible drumming effect. Form removable outside panel with lip to fit over inside panel on top edge, and to lock into position at bottom with rivets to form a rigid, one-piece 19mm (3/4”) thick drawer front.

b. Provide drawer operation on Full Extension Drawer Slides, 508mm (20”) extension, load capacity 45kg (100 pounds).: Equal to: Knape & Vogt #8400B.

c. Drawer body shall consist of one piece construction including the bottom, two sides, back and inner front flanged end which shall be welded to the interior drawer front head. The exterior drawer front shall have a channel formation on the top edge with ground smooth and fully finished return edges telescoping together to form fully sounded-deadened drawer front. Drawer bodies shall have a reinforcing bend on top edges.

d. Provide built-in stops to prevent inadvertent removal of drawers, with allowance for drawer to be removed by lifting front of drawers and pulling out.

e. Provide drawer pulls in central location of drawer face. Two handles shall be provided on units 762mm (30”) and larger.

5. Apron Drawer Assembly:

a. Apron drawer assembly shall be fabricated from metal channel shaped skirting panels of modular widths the same as standard base cabinets. Rails 95mm (3-3/4”) high channel ends shall be turned to fit into end mounting brackets. Drawer suspension framing shall be mechanically fixed to channels, welded integrally with front and back channel sections formed into a rigid one-piece frame.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 7

b. Where called for, drawers located in table aprons shall be supplied in a maximum width of 381mm (15”) with two drawers supplied in tables 1219mm (48”) and wider. Drawer suspension shall be with 25mm (1”) nylon ball bearing rollers and self-closing action, custom manufactured 1.5mm (16 Ga) suspension system.

6. Front Rails:

a. Front rail units shall be fabricated from a single metal channel-shaped skirting panel in modular widths the same as standard base cabinets. Channel ends shall be turned to fit into end mounting brackets. Rails are 95mm (3-3/4”) high.

7. Service Cover Panels:

a. Service cover panels shall be provided, where called for, between base cabinets to enclose the pipe space. Service cover panels shall be designed in two sections. The lower section shall be fixed in place to mount cove base moulding. The upper section shall be fitted between the base cabinets and shall be removable.

D. Floor/Wall Cabinet Components:

1. Materials and Thicknesses:

Use the following standard steel thicknesses for this furniture manufacturing:

a. 1.2mm (18 Ga) leveled prime grade furniture steel for sides, top, back, bottom, false bottom, dust caps and bases on tall storage cabinets.

b. 3mm (11 Ga) cold rolled steel for levelling device brackets on floor storage cabinets only.

2. Wall Storage Cabinets Sliding Glass Door Type:

a. Cabinet sides, bottom and top shall be flat panels die-formed "U" shaped flange on front edge and a return flange on back edges. Provide top and bottom panels with 40mm (1-9/16”) flanges on both ends with double returns. Reinforce front flanges on both sides and top with a flanged "U" shaped member. Both front side stile reinforcing channels shall contain a vertical row of shelf support clip holes 5mm (3/16”) round or square and 13mm (1/2”) o.c. Reinforce bottom with "U" channel.

b. Wall cabinets shall be provided with an internally painted, flush bottom enclosure interlocking with front floor of cabinet as a telescoping panel with flange at rear and secured through the cabinet back.

c. Provide shelves with edges turned down on 4 sides 25mm (1”), and return under on front and back by 25mm (1”). Provide shelf adjustment on 13mm (1/2”) increments for full height of cabinet interior. Provide a minimum of four plated shelf clips per shelf. Provide shelves 914mm (36”) and longer with ‘HAT” channel reinforcement at front edge.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 8

d. Provide sliding glass doors in 6mm (1/4”) sheet glass with "H" shaped extruded aluminum shoes fixed to and running the full width of the door bottom. Provide vinyl glazing channel fixed into shoe. Provide 2 removable spring steel and nylon wheel assemblies, one located at each end. The door assembly shall run on an inverted double "Y" shaped extruded aluminium track. Provide each door at top with 2 PVC guides running in double "U" shaped extruded aluminum track. One finger pull per door shall be ground into glass on side of door next to cabinet frame.

e. Install bumpers on vertical reinforcement members of the cabinet frame.

3. Dust Cap:

a. Dust caps shall be fabricated from 1.2mm (18 Ga) steel, and shall mount flush with the front edge of the cabinet and extend back at an angle of 30 degrees to a point perpendicular to the rear of the cabinet. Ends shall be finished and flanged so as to allow attachment to the cabinet below.

E. Steel Furniture Finish

1. All steel furniture in this section shall be constructed of stainless steel with a #4 brushed finish. Grain direction shall be horizontal except where cabinet dimensions do not permit.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL WORKSURFACE

A. Material

1. 304 or 316 stainless steel with a #4 brushed finish.

a. 14 Ga.

b. 16 Ga.

c. 18 Ga.

B. Methods: All factory welds shall be made using the TIG process. Filler rod shall be of the same composition as the base material.

C. Tops: Form tops with 1.25” high edges with 0.5” return flange. Reinforce with particle board wood core or metal hat channels as required. Form edges, flanges and backsplashes integrally from one sheet of steel. Intersections between backsplashes and work surface shall be radiused a minimum of 0.375”.

D. Joints: Factory welds shall be ground and polished to provide an invisible joint. Field connections shall be mechanical “tongue and groove” interlocking design with concealed bolts to provide a hairline seam.

E. Sound Deadener: Countertops shall have sound deadening material applied as required to the underside. Nominal thickness shall be 0.062”. Sound deadener shall be waterborne, non-flammable and shall contain no volatile organic compounds.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 9

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLERS

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer shall have a minimum of 5 years continued experience in installation or application of systems similar to those required for this project.

2. Installer shall be authorized by either the distributor or manufacturer. Warranty will be void if unauthorized installer executes the installation.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Casework will not be delivered or installed until the following conditions have been met:

a. An operational HVAC system that maintains temperature and humidity at occupancy levels must be in place;

b. Ceiling, overhead ductwork and lighting must be installed;

c. Site must be free of any further construction such as “wet work.”

d. Required backing and reinforcements must be installed accurately and the project must be ready for casework installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Casework Installation:

1. Casework shall be set with components plumb, straight and square, securely anchored to building structure with no distortion. Concealed shims shall be used as required.

2. Cabinets in continuous runs shall be fastened together with joints flush, uniform and tight with misalignment of adjacent units not to exceed 1/16 of an inch.

3. Wall casework shall be secured to solid material, not lath, plastic or gypsum board.

4. Top edge surfaces shall be abutted in one true plane. Joints are to be flush and gap shall not exceed 1/8 of an inch between tops units.

5. Casework and hardware shall be adjusted and aligned to allow for accurate connection of contact points and efficient operation of doors and drawers without any warping or binding.

B. Countertop Installation:

1. Countertops are to have been fabricated in lengths according to drawings, with ends abutting tightly and sealed with corrosion resistant sealant.

15017-00 12 35 53.13 - 10

2. Tops will be anchored to base casework in a single true plane with ends abutting at hairline joints with no raised edges at joints.

3. Joints shall be factory prepared having no need for in-field processing of top and edge surfaces.

4. Joints shall be dressed smoothly, surface scratches removed and entire surface cleaned thoroughly.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Ensure all products are unsoiled and match factory finish. Remove or repair damaged or defective units.

B. Clean all finished surfaces, including drawers and cabinet shelves, and touch up as necessary.

C. Countertops shall be cleaned and free of grease or streaks.

3.4 PROTECTION:

A. Counter tops and ledges shall be protected with 1/4 inch ribbed cardboard for the remainder of the construction process.

B. Examine casework for damaged or soiled areas; replace, repair, and touch-up as required.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

- END OF SECTION 12 35 53.13 -

15017-00 22 00 00 - 1

SECTION 22 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. All work shall be in accordance with the "General Conditions", "Supplemental General Conditions" and the "General Requirements for Mechanical Work".

B. All work shall be in accordance with City Building and Plumbing Codes and with all state and national codes as they may apply to the project and to public safety.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. It is the intent to furnish and install complete plumbing systems, fully adjusted and ready for use.

B. Materials and equipment have been carefully selected for the project and the contractor is expected to provide items as closely as possible to the specifications.

C. The drawings accompanying these specifications show the extent of the plumbing work and the general arrangement. The drawings, however, are diagrammatic and exact layout of the systems is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.3 PLUMBING SUBMITTAL DATA

A. The Contractor shall check all items of submittal data and verify by statement and initial that each item has been checked for the following conditions:

1. Item is equal to specified item in construction and quality.

2. Item is of the same physical size. If not of the same physical size, the dimensions have been checked and item will fit within the allocated space shown on the plans. Where items proposed are different than scheduled items, furnish 1/4 in. scale plan and 1/4 in. sections on tracing paper (for direct overlay) of proposed equipment including space required for connections or service. The tracing of 1/4 in. plans and 1/4 in. sections must be furnished with submittal for other than scheduled equipment in order to compare proposed equipment with scheduled equipment.

3. System connections to the item can be made as shown on the plans.

4. Shop drawings show in detail all connections, etc., required to meet the overall specifications in every detail.

5. Statement of guarantee that the proposed equipment shall operate properly as applied to the project and will not require additional devices or changes in the installation shown on the plans.

B. Complete specification data shall be submitted for all plumbing items and including the list below:

1. Plumbing Fixtures;

15017-00 22 00 00 - 2

2. Insulation;

3. Pipe;

4. Valves.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 SOIL AND WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM

A. Piping below grade or below building shall be standard weight Schedule 40 PVC. Install piping at a minimum slope of 2% inside building and 1% outside building, unless indicated or required otherwise. Installation of PVC plastic drainage piping underfloor and underground shall be in compliance with ASTM D-2321, Latest Edition, “Standard Practice for Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications”. Minimum trench width shall be pipe diameter plus 16 in. and all bedding materials shall meet Class 1A or Class 1B-bedding criteria.

B. Piping above grade and inside building shall be standard weight cast iron hubless soil pipe and fittings with stainless steel couplings or Schedule 40 PVC. Install piping at a minimum slope of 2%, or as required by local codes. Do not install PVC piping in any return air plenums.

C. New A/C condensate drain piping shall be Type M copper drainage tube and fittings with lead free solder joints. Install vented U-type drain trap for all draw-thru cooling coil drain pans. All piping not on the roof shall be insulated with 1 in. thick fiberglass with Universal jacket.

D. Cleanouts shall be Josam or approved equal:

1. Floors: Series 56000, Bronze top.

2. Wall: Series 58710, cleanout tee with plug, and Series 58600 access cover, chrome-plated bronze.

E. All piping inside the building shall be supported from building structure. Parallel runs of horizontal piping shall be grouped together on trapeze hangers. Single runs of horizontal piping shall be supported with clevis hangers. Vertical risers shall be supported at each floor with steel pipe clamps. Wire or perforated straps for pipe supports will not be permitted. Support horizontal runs of piping at 5 ft.-0 in. intervals and at base of each stack.

2.2 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS

A. All piping inside building shall be Type L hard copper pipe and wrought copper fittings. Joints shall be made with lead free solder. Piping below floor slabs shall be Type K soft copper tubing. There shall be no joints in tubing below slabs.

B. Valves shall be as follows, or equal:

1. Check Valves - 2-1/2 in. and smaller: Nibco T-413/S-413, 125 lb. SWP bronze;

2. Ball Valves - 2-1/2 in. and smaller: Nibco T-580/S-580, 150 lb. SWP bronze;

3. Balance Valves - 2-1/2 in. and smaller: Homestead 601;

15017-00 22 00 00 - 3

4. Strainers - 2 in. and smaller: Crane 988-1/2.

C. All piping inside building shall be supported from the building structure. All piping shall be concealed above ceilings, in pipe chases, etc. Parallel runs of horizontal piping shall be grouped together on trapeze type hangers. Single pipe runs shall be supported with split-ring clevis type hangers. Hangers shall pass around pipe insulation. At each hanger and support point provide an 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal protective band, minimum 8 in. long, to protect the insulation. Vertical risers shall be supported at each floor with steel pipe clamps. Wire or perforated straps for pipe hangers will not be permitted. Pipe hangers and supports shall be spaced a maximum of 6 ft. 0 in. on 1-1/4 in. and smaller pipe and a maximum of 10 ft. 0 in. on all other pipe.

D. Insulate all interior domestic water piping (cold, hot, hot water recirculating) with 1-in. thick fiberglass insulation with ASJ.

E. Provide isolating couplings where two different pipe materials connect. Provide a vacuum breaker or backflow preventer for any equipment as required by the City.

F. Provide factory manufactured water hammer arrestors where required and/or indicated on the drawings.

2.3 GAS PIPING SYSTEM

A. Piping inside building and exposed piping above grade shall be Schedule 40 black steel. 2-1/2 in. and larger shall have welded joints, 2 in. and smaller shall have screwed joints. All piping for gas 1 psi and above shall be welded.

B. Exterior Steel Piping Above Ground, including all piping on the roof: Field apply two coats of exterior grade enamel paint. Color: Match existing.

C. At each connection to mechanical or plumbing equipment, furnish and install a dirt leg (full size of run out), a 100% shut-off plug-valve, and a union. Do not use flexible gas whips for final connection to equipment.

D. Gas cocks shall be as follows, or equal:

1. 2-1/2 in. and larger: Homestead 602;

2. 2 in. and smaller: Crane No. 1228.

E. New piping supports on the roof shall match existing. Repair or replace any damaged supports associated with new units.

F. The piping shall be protected at all time from dirt and moisture. During storage on the job site or construction, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall keep pipe ends plugged or capped to prevent dirt or moisture entering the pipe.

G. Interior piping shall be tested before equipment is connected.

2.4 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. All fixtures shall be new, of current manufacturer and of the best of their respective kinds. They shall be free of blemishes, waves, kiln marks and discoloration. All fixture surfaces in contact with walls, floors, etc., shall be ground truly flat.

15017-00 22 00 00 - 4

B. All directly exposed metal associated with fixtures including pipe, traps, bolts, nuts, washers, etc., shall be stainless steel or chrome plated brass. Nuts exposed to direct view shall be cap nuts (closed top) type leaving no screw threads exposed.

C. Contractor shall provide proper support for fixtures and piping. Wall hung fixtures not specified to be furnished with carriers shall be supported with angle iron back-ups located inside chase or wall. Bolts shall extend through and be welded to the angle and extend through to fixture hanger. Wall hung lavatories shall have drilled bolt holes through lower skirt and shall be additionally secured by bolts through skirt into the angle iron back-up.

D. Plumbing fixtures shall be grouted at walls and floors with fine dental plaster. Clean excess plaster from the fixture and other surfaces.

E. Supply piping to all plumbing fixtures, hose bibs, equipment etc., shall be anchored with "U" bolts and a steel angle at wall penetrations to prevent pipe movement.

F. The plumbing fixtures shall be as scheduled. Provide the required trim and accessories for all plumbing fixtures whether specifically called out or not.

G. Install offset traps and factory manufactured piping insulation kits for all exposed piping for handicap fixtures as required.

H. All faucets shall be free of lead per NSF-61.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve.

C. Install each fixture with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons.

D. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

E. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment and part of systems.

F. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

G. Do not install PVC piping in any return air plenums.

H. Installation of PVC plastic drainage piping underfloor and underground shall be in compliance with ASTM D-2321, Latest Edition, “Standard Practice for Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications”. Minimum trench width shall be pipe diameter plus 16 in. and all bedding materials shall meet Class 1A or Class 1B-bedding criteria.

I. Soft copper shall not be routed through areas with exposed ceilings except in mechanical rooms.

15017-00 22 00 00 - 5

3.2 TESTING

A. General: Furnish pumps, gauges, equipment and personnel required, and test as necessary to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation.

B. Water Lines: Hydrostatically test and make tight at 125 psi. Retain for 24 hours. Repair all leaking joints and retest.

C. Natural Gas: Pneumatically test and make tight at 1-1/2 times the normal operating pressure, but not less than 50 psi. Retain for 24 hours. Repair all leaking joints and retest.

3.3 FLUSHING

A. General: After piping systems have been tested and approved, systems shall be flushed. Furnish compressors, pumps, equipment, personnel, etc. required to flush piping systems.

B. Water Lines: Flush piping with water until water flows clear for a minimum of 60 seconds per 100 linear ft. of piping being flushed at a velocity of 9 ft. per second.

C. Natural Gas: Flush piping with air until air flows clear for a minimum of 60 seconds per 100 linear ft. of piping being flushed at 25 CFM per 1 in. diameter of pipe.

D. All strainers and filters shall be cleaned and replaced prior to start-up.


15017-00 23 00 00 - 1

SECTION 23 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS AND SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. The "General Conditions" and "Supplementary Conditions" are by reference made a part of this section and shall apply to each and every heading as though included herein.

B. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the "General Conditions" and "Supplementary Conditions" will take precedence over these "General Requirements".

1.2 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall provide all plans, labor, equipment, appliances and materials, and shall perform all operations in connection with the installation of the mechanical work in accordance with the Specifications, applicable drawings, and the conditions specified above.

B. Contractor shall provide all equipment required and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems whether or not specifically mentioned or specifically indicated on the drawings.

1.3 INSPECTION OF THE SITE

A. The Contractor shall visit the site, verifying all existing items indicated on drawings and/or specified, and familiarize himself with the existing work conditions, hazards, grades, actual formations, soil conditions, and local requirements. The submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of such visits.

B. All proposals shall take these existing conditions into consideration, and the lack of specific information on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility.

C. In the event that equipment specified and/or reviewed is not compatible with the existing conditions, the trade furnishing the equipment shall be responsible for notifying the Contractor prior to ordering it.

1.4 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS, AND INSPECTIONS

A. Refer to other sections of the specifications for construction phasing and time increments.

B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required utility connections, impact fees, meters and meter boxes, utility extensions and/or relocations and shall pay all costs and inspection fees for all work included herein.

1.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The installation shall meet the minimum standards prescribed in the latest editions of the following listed codes and standards, which are made a part of the Specifications, except as may be hereinafter modified in these Specifications and associated drawings.

B. Latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA):

1. NFPA No. 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems

15017-00 23 00 00 - 2

2. NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code

3. NFPA No. 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating systems

4. NFPA No. 101 Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures

5. NFPA No. 255 Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

C. United States of America Standards Institute (ASA) Standards:

1. A40.8 National Plumbing Code

2. B31.1 & B31.1a Code for Pressure Piping

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes.

E. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI): All standards related to refrigeration and air conditioning equipment and piping furnished under these Specifications.

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) 1985: All applicable manuals and standards.

G. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA): All applicable manuals and standards.

H. American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM): All applicable manuals and standards.

I. American Water Works Association (AWWA): All applicable manuals and standards.

J. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): All applicable manuals and standards.

K. City Fire Department as applicable to construction of this site.

L. City and State Building Codes.

M. State of (Texas) Occupational Safety Act: Applicable safety standards.

N. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

O. State of (Texas) Energy Conservation Construction Code.

P. All work shall be in accordance with all regulations and requirements of the State of Texas Architectural Barriers Act (TAS).

Q. Texas Department of Health (TDH) Licensing Standards.

R. Refer to Specifications sections hereinafter bound for additional codes and standards.

S. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable state and national codes, specifications, and industry standards. All material shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., as conforming to its standards and so labeled in every case where such a standard has been established for the particular type of material in question.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 3

T. All equipment provided and all installation methods shall meet all applicable requirements of the 2015 Internation Energy Conservation Code.

U. The Contract Documents are intended to comply with the aforementioned rules and regulations; however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the Contractor shall immediately apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the execution of a contract, any additional work required for compliance with said regulations shall be paid for as covered by other specifications of the Contract Documents, providing no work or fabrication of materials has been accomplished in a manner of non-compliance. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable codes, rules and regulations, the Contractor who performed such work shall bear all costs arising in correcting these deficiencies to comply with said rules and regulations.

1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. These specifications are accompanied by drawings of the building and details of the installations indicating the locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, outlets, switch controls, circuits, lines, etc. The drawings and these specifications are complementary to each other, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by both.

B. If the Contractor deems any departures from the drawings necessary, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect for review. No departures shall be made without prior written acceptance.

C. There are intricacies of construction that are impractical to specify or indicate in detail; however, in such cases the current rules of good practice and applicable specifications shall govern.

D. It is the Contractor's responsibility to properly use all information found on the Civil, Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings where such information affects his work.

E. All dimensional information related to new structures should be taken from the appropriate drawings. All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actual measurements made by the Contractor on the site.

F. The interrelation of the specifications, the drawings, and the schedules is as follows: The specifications determine the nature and setting of the several materials, the drawings establish the quantities, dimensions and details, and the schedules give the performance characteristics.

G. Should the drawings or specifications disagree within themselves, or with each other, the better quality of greater quantity of work or materials shall be estimated upon, and unless otherwise directed by the Architect in writing, shall be performed or furnished. Figures indicated on drawings govern scale measurements and large-scale details govern small-scale drawings.

1.7 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT

A. The size of mechanical and electrical equipment indicated on the drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Shop drawings shall be prepared to indicate a suitable arrangement.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 4

B. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part.

1.8 FABRICATION DRAWINGS

A. Each Contractor shall submit shop drawings whenever (1) equipment proposed varies in physical size and arrangement from that indicated on the drawings, thus causing rearrangement of equipment space, (2) where tight spaces require extreme coordination between ductwork, piping, conduit and other equipment, and (3) where called for elsewhere in these specifications.

1.9 SUPERVISION

A. Each contractor shall keep a competent superintendent or foreman on the job at all times necessary for the timely and proper completion of the work.

B. It shall be the responsibility of each superintendent to study all drawings and familiarize himself with the work to be done by other trades. He shall coordinate this work with other trades, and before material is fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not cause an interference that cannot be resolved without major changes to the drawings. If a conflict between trades arises that cannot be resolved at the jobsite, the matter shall be referred to the Architect for his ruling.

1.10 EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen, and shall be responsible for repairing or replacing such loss or damage. The Contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, and perform other services required for the care, protection and in-service maintenance of all plumbing, heating, air conditioning, and ventilating services for the new and existing facilities. The Contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices, as required to protect personnel from injury, and remove all such temporary protection upon completion of the work. All barricades and safety devices shall be in compliance with OSHA.

B. The Contractor shall provide temporary or new services to all existing facilities as required to maintain their proper operation when normal services are disrupted as a result of the work being accomplished under this project.

C. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, Contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected.

D. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are indicated to be removed, all Contractors shall remove and reinstall, in locations approved by the Architect, all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing construction. This is to include, but is not limited to, temperature control system devices, electrical switches, relays, fixtures, piping, conduit, etc.

E. Outages of services, as required by the new installation, will be permitted only at a time approved by the Owner.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 5

1.11 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION

A. The Contractor shall modify, remove and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition.

B. All items that are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved.

C. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed and sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Architect. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas of facilities, which must remain in operation during the construction period, shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Architect as hereinbefore specified.

D. All equipment and materials indicated to be removed and not be re-used shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor shall prepare, in triplicate for the Owner's Manual, complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions, system piping, valving, control and interlock diagrams, manuals, parts lists, etc., for each item of equipment.

1.13 GUARANTEE

A. All work and equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion.

B. Guarantee shall be for all labor and materials.

C. Certain items for equipment shall have additional or extended guarantees when so specified.

1.14 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be of current U.S. manufacture, new, free from all defects, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the best standard practice for the type of work involved. All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective trades, and the installations shall present a neat, workmanlike appearance. Materials, and/or equipment damaged in shipment, or otherwise damaged prior to installation, shall not be repaired at the job site, but shall be replaced with new materials and/or equipment.

B. The responsibility for furnishing the proper equipment and/or material, and to see that it is installed as intended by the manufacturer rests entirely upon the Contractor, who shall request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of specific manufacturers during the installation.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 6

1.15 FLAME SPREAD PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS

A. Materials and adhesives incorporated in this project shall conform to NFPA 255, latest edition. The classification shall not exceed No. 2, with the range of indices between 0 to 25 for these Classifications as listed in the Federal Specifications. Modifications shall be made to insulating materials, etc., as required to comply with the Federal Specification.

1.16 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES

A. Except as otherwise noted, provide chrome plated brass floor and ceiling plates around all pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., passing exposed through walls, floors, or ceilings, in any spaces, except under floor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe or against the insulation on lines that are insulated and positively secured to such pipe or insulation. Plates will not be required for piping where pipe sleeves extend 3/4 in. above finished floor. All equipment rooms are classified as finished areas. Round and rectangular ducts shall have plates made to fit accurately at all floor, wall and ceiling penetrations.

1.17 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND FASTENINGS

A. Proper openings through floors, walls, roofs, etc., for the passage of piping, ductwork, etc., shall be provided. All penetrations must pass through sleeves except soil pipe installed under concrete slabs on fill. Sleeves shall be set in new construction before concrete is poured, as cutting holes through any part of the concrete will not be permitted unless acceptable to the Architect.

B. Pipes passing through concrete or cinder walls and floor or other corrosive material shall be protected by a protective sheathing or wrapping or by sleeves, as required to meet the local code. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes shall be filled or tightly caulked in an approved manner. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes in fire-resistance-rated assemblies shall be filled or tightly caulked in accordance with the local code.

C. The minimum clearance between horizontal penetrations including insulation where applicable, and sleeves shall be 1/4 in., except that the minimum clearance shall be 2 in. where piping contacts the ground. Sleeves through walls and partitions shall be installed flush with exposed surfaces. Sleeves through floors shall be extended 2 in. above finished floor.

D. Above grade and dry location sleeves shall be constructed from 20 to 22 gauge galvanized steel. Sleeves passing through walls or floors on or below grade and/or moist areas such as mechanical rooms shall be constructed of galvanized steel Schedule 40 pipe and shall be designed with suitable flange in the center of the floor or wall to form a waterproof passage. After the pipes have been installed in the sleeves, void space around the pipe shall be sealed with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seals as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation.

E. Suitable concrete inserts for pipe and equipment hangers shall be set and properly located for all pipe and equipment to be suspended from concrete construction.

F. Fastening of pipes, conduits, etc., in the building shall be as follows: To wood members - by wood screws; to masonry - by threaded metal inserts, metal expansion screws, or toggle bolts, whichever is appropriate for the particular type of masonry; to steel - machine screws or welding (when specifically permitted or directed), or bolts, and to concrete by suitable inserts anchored to reinforcing steel, and poured in place unless other means are acceptable for general use, and will only be permitted where specifically acceptable to the Architect.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 7

G. Under no circumstances will the use of plastic anchors or plastic expansion shields be permitted for any purpose whatsoever.

H. Vermin Proofing: The open space around all ductwork, piping, etc., passing through the ground floor and/or exterior walls shall be sealed with a continuous bead of sealant.

I. The space around piping, ductwork, etc., penetrating walls, ceilings and floors that define air plenums shall be sealed airtight in an acceptable manner. Ceiling plenums used for return air are considered air plenums.

1.18 ACCESS DOORS

A. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed shutoff or service valves, fire and/or smoke dampers, and other items of concealed mechanical equipment. All access door locations are not shown on the drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide access doors at all locations required.

B. Refer to Architectural Specification Division 08 for requirements.

1.19 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. The Civil, Architectural, Structural and Electrical plans and specifications including the General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical drawings, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included in the Contract Documents, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of architectural, structural and electrical details from the mechanical drawings.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. In the event that additional details or special construction may be required for work indicated or specified in this section or work specified in other sections, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or required to complete the installation, whether mentioned or not.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation.

D. The mechanical and associated drawings are necessarily diagrammatic in character and cannot show every connection in detail or every pipe or equipment in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of ordinances and also structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. Work shall be installed to avoid crippling of structural members; therefore, inserts to accommodate pipe hangers shall be set before concrete is poured, and proper openings through floor, walls, beams, etc., shall be provided as hereinafter specified or as otherwise indicated or required. All work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 8

E. When the mechanical drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, ducts, etc., physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with the proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping and duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner, and the plans do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. Piping specified to be insulated shall be supported in a manner that will allow the insulation to be installed without gaps. Insulated piping in concealed areas shall be offset with fittings as necessary to permit installation of insulation. Bending of pipes or installing pipes in a strain in order to insulate will not be permitted.

F. All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustment shall be easily accessible. Equipment shall be so located and installed as to permit convenient and safe maintenance and future replacement. Piping, ductwork, valve stems, etc., shall not block service space.

1.20 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and the Division 01 Section " SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES" for requirements in selecting products and requesting substitutions.

B. Standards for Materials:

1. These specifications indicate a standard for all materials incorporated into the work, with manufacturer's names and catalog numbers used to establish a grade and quality of materials and equipment. The manufacturer listed on the equipment schedules, or named first in the specifications, is the one on whose equipment the layout is based. Other named manufacturers must meet the indicated performance and space requirements.

2. The "approved equal" clause used in these specifications is to permit the proposal of unnamed manufacturer's products for the work, and the Architect/Engineer's decision concerning equal products is final.

3. Considerations as to determination of equal products include, but are not limited to, the following:

Materials Physical size Workmanship Weight Gauges of Materials Appearance Available Local Service Personnel Performance Previous successful installations Capacity Delivery Schedules Required Equipment Clearances

C. Requests for substitutions for equipment, materials and apparatus listed in Division 23 Sections must be submitted in writing a MINIMUM OF 10 DAYS prior to the scheduled bid date. Such requests must be accompanied by complete data to permit proper evaluation.

D. BIDS SHALL NOT BE BASED ON UN-APPROVED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, OR APPARATUS. UNAPPROVED MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT OR APPARATUS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.

E. Should electrical, water, drain, natural gas, structural support, or other similar requirements for alternate equipment, whether named in the specifications or approved as a substitution, be different from requirements for the products used in laying out the project, such changes

15017-00 23 00 00 - 9

shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and shall not result in extra charges to the Owner, Architect, or Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. The manufacturer's published instructions shall be followed for preparing, assembling, installing, erecting, and cleaning manufacturer's materials or equipment, unless otherwise indicated. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect's instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies.

B. The Contractor shall not receive material or equipment at the jobsite until there is suitable space provided to properly protect equipment from rust, drip, humidity, and dust damage.

C. Capacities shall be not less than those indicated but shall be such that no component or system becomes inoperative or is damaged because of start-up or other overload conditions.

D. Where materials or equipment are specified to be approved, listed, tested, or labeled by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or constructed and/or tested in accordance with the standards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or the Air Moving and Conditioning Association, the Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under these sections of the specifications conform to such requirements. The ASME stamp or the AMCA label will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to the respective requirements.

E. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment. All data on nameplates shall be legible at the time of Final Observation.

F. Standard factory finish will be acceptable on equipment specified by model number; otherwise surfaces of ferrous metal shall be given a rust-inhibiting coating. The treatment shall withstand 200 hours in salt-spray fog test, in accordance with Method 6061 of Federal Standard No. 141. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall show no signs of wrinkling or cracking, and no signs of rust creepage beyond 1/8 in. on either side of the scratch mark. Where rust-inhibitor coating is specified hereinafter, any treatment that will pass the above test is acceptable, unless a specific coating is specified, except that coal tar or asphalt type coatings will not be acceptable, unless so stated for a specific item. Where steel is specified to be hot-dip galvanized, mill-galvanized sheet steel may be used provided all raw edges are painted with a zinc-pigmented paint conforming to Military Specification MIL-P-6215.

G. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other rotating parts located so that any person can come in close proximity thereto, shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work and working conditions, to verify all dimensions in the field, and to advise the Architect of any discrepancy before performing any work. Adjustments to the work required, in order to facilitate a coordinated installation, shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 10

2.2 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question.

B. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, steel treads, and workmen or their tools and equipment shall cover finished surfaces to prevent any damage during the construction of the building.

C. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final observation must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these specifications.

2.3 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES AND WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

A. Each trade, subcontractor and/or contractor must work in harmony with the various other trades, subcontractors, and/or contractors on the job as may be required to facilitate the progress to the best advantage of the job as a whole. Each trade, subcontractor, and/or contractor must pursue his work promptly and carefully as not to delay the general progress of the job. This Contractor shall work in harmony with contractors working under other contracts on the premises.

2.4 PRECEDENCE OF MATERIALS

A. These specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to cover systems which will not interfere with the structural design of the building, which will fit into the available space, and which will insure complete and satisfactory systems. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the building.

B. Each Contractor shall so harmonize his work with that of the other trades so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or handicapping the other trades. Piping interferences shall be handled by giving precedence to pipelines that require a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, the following order of precedence shall, in general, be observed:

1. Building lines

2. Structural members

3. Soil and drain piping

4. Vent piping

5. Condensate piping

6. Refrigerant piping

7. Electrical bus duct

15017-00 23 00 00 - 11

8. Supply ductwork

9. Return ductwork

10. Exhaust ductwork

11. Chilled water and heating water piping

12. Automatic Fire Protection Sprinkler Piping

13. Natural gas piping

14. Domestic hot and cold water piping

15. Electrical conduit

2.5 LOCATION OF OUTLETS IN ROOMS

A. All plumbing, acoustical tile, diffusers, grilles, registers, and other devices shall be referenced to coordinated, established data points and shall be located to present symmetrical arrangements with these points and to facilitate the proper arrangements of acoustical tile panels and other similar panels with respect to the mechanical and electrical outlets and devices. Those mechanical and electrical outlets shall be referenced to such features as wall and ceiling furrings, balanced border widths, masonry joints, etc. Outlets in acoustical tile shall occur symmetrically in tile joints or in the center of whole tiles. When locations of mechanical and electrical devices shown on the Architect's reflected ceiling plans need to be modified, the final determination of the exact location of each outlet and the arrangement to be followed shall be acceptable to the Architect.

B. The drawings show diagrammatically the location of the various outlets and apparatus. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with the other trades. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation, without additional cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor, by submitting a bid on this work, sets forth that he has the necessary technical training and ability, and that he will install his work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner which is up to the best standards of the trade, complete, and in good working order. If any of the requirements of the drawings and specifications are impossible of performance, or if the installation, when made in accordance with such requirements, will not perform satisfactorily, he shall report it to the Architect for correction promptly after discovery of the discrepancy.

2.6 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS

A. This Contractor shall rough-in for and make all gas, water, steam, sewer, etc., connections to all fixtures, equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing-in drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, along with actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed.

B. After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 12

C. Provide all air gap fittings where required. In each water line serving an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shut-off valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap.

D. All pipefittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome-plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. All pipes shall be concealed in pipe chases, walls, furred spaces, or above the ceiling, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Piping may be run exposed in mechanical rooms, janitors' closets, or storage spaces, but only where necessary. All exposed piping shall be run in the neatest, most inconspicuous manner, and parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

C. All piping shall be adequately and properly supported from the building structure by means of hanger rods or clamps to walls as herein specified.

D. Where limited space is available above the ceilings and below concrete beams or other deep projections, pipe and conduit shall be sleeved through the projection where it crosses, in a manner to provide maximum above-floor clearance. Sleeves shall be as specified or as required.

E. All pipe, conduits, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts, pipes and conduits run, exposed in machinery and equipment rooms, shall be installed parallel to the building plans, except as otherwise shown. Conduits in furred ceilings and in other concealed spaces may be run at angles to the construction but shall be neatly grouped and racked indicating good workmanship. All conduit and pipe openings shall be kept closed until the systems are closed with final connections.

F. There shall be no pipe joints nearer than 12 in. to a wall, ceiling, or floor penetration, unless pipe joint is the welded type joint.

G. The Contractor shall study all construction documents and carefully lay out all work in advance of fabrication and erection in order to meet the requirements of the extremely limited spaces. Where conflicts occur, the Contractor shall meet with all involved trades and the Architect and resolve the conflict, prior to erection of any work, in the area involved.


A. Cut and patch openings through walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction.

B. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills at locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact-type equipment will not be used, except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. Openings in Precast concrete slabs for pipes, conduits, outlet boxes, etc., shall be core drilled or cast to exact size.

C. All openings shall be restored to "as-new" condition under the appropriate Specification Section for the materials involved, and shall match remaining surrounding materials and/or finishes.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 13

D. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

E. All mechanical work in areas containing plaster shall be completed prior to the application of the finish plaster coat. Cutting of finish plaster coat will not be permitted.

F. No cutting, boring, or excavating, which will weaken the structure, shall be undertaken.

3.3 ROOF PENETRATIONS AND FLASHING

A. Pipe and duct sleeves and flashings compatible with the roofing installation shall be provided for roof penetrations. Manufacturer of roofing materials shall approve methods and materials. Pitch pans are not acceptable.

3.4 FABRICATION OF PIPE

A. All the various piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Lines shall also be graded for proper drainage.

B. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, but shall take into consideration conditions to be met at the site.

C. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval has been obtained.

D. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping, in connections, and in equipment to which lines are connected.

E. All piping shall be clean when it is installed. Before installation it shall be checked, upended, swabbed, if necessary, and all rust or dirt from storage shall be removed. Pipe shall not be permitted to lie on the ground during storage. Pipe ends shall be sealed during storage.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING

A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them.

B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16 in. thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2 in. high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Air Handling Units

2. Air conditioning control panels and switches

15017-00 23 00 00 - 14

3. Motor controllers

4. Miscellaneous similar and/or related items.

3.6 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work and upon its completion, test his work and make all tests as required by the specifications, state, municipal and other authorities having jurisdiction of the work. Piping pressure tests shall be made before pipe is concealed or covered. Tests shall be made in the presence of authorities requiring tests. The Contractor shall pay all costs, inspection charges and fees required for the tests of his work.

B. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, temporary piping connection, etc., required for tests. The Contractor shall take all due precautions to prevent damage to the building or its contents incurred by such tests. The Contractor shall repair and make good at his own expense any damage caused by failures or leaks during the tests.

C. Leaks, defects or deficiencies shall be repaired and/or replaced, and tests shall be repeated until the test requirements are complied with fully.

D. All equipment shall be placed in operation and tested for proper automatic control before the final balancing of the system is started.

E. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall include date, time, personnel, description, and extent of system tested, test condition, test results, specified results, and any other pertinent data. Data shall be delivered to the Architect.

3.7 COOPERATION AND CLEANUP

A. It shall be the responsibility of each trade to cooperate fully with the other trades on the job to help keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment and materials and shall clean his debris from the job. Upon the completion of the job, each trade shall immediately remove all of his tools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by his portion of the work.

3.8 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. All equipment, piping, ductwork, grills, insulation, etc., in finished areas furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be painted. Finished areas include mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, and outside the building as well as occupied areas inside the building. Final painting is to be done by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall thoroughly clean all part of materials and equipment of cement, plaster, and other materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean.

B. This Contractor shall thoroughly clean the finish on all parts of the materials and equipment with factory applied finishes. Exposed parts in equipment rooms, above crawl space slabs, and all other spaces except sealed chases and attics shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. If the finish has been damaged, the Contractor shall re-paint to the satisfaction of the Architect.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 15

C. All canvas finishes shall be painted with one sizing coat if not already sized, containing a mildew resistant additive and Arabol adhesive prior to any other specified finish paint.

D. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be afforded to the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible during painting operation.

3.9 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK

A. The extent of electrical provisions to be provided as mechanical work is indicated in other mechanical sections of the specifications, on the drawings and as further specified in this section.

B. Starters, Controllers: In general, mechanical work includes furnishing combination starters. Controllers are specifically included as electrical work when mounted in motor control centers. Electrical work includes installation, mounting and wiring of starters and controllers that are furnished as mechanical work. Free standing, large motor controllers shall be set in place, on pads, as mechanical work.

C. Electrical heating equipment shall be furnished complete with internal or integral fusing and subdivision of loads to comply with the NEC.

D. Wherever possible, match the elements of the electrical provisions of mechanical work with similar elements of the electrical work specified in electrical sections of the specifications.

E. Standards:

1. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards, and refer to NEMA standards to definitions of terminology herein.

2. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70) for installation requirements.

3. Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation".

3.10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Unless noted otherwise in the Supplementary General Conditions; provide temporary facilities.

3.11 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. All mechanical (plumbing, fire protection and HVAC) equipment shall be furnished and installed complete and ready for use.

B. Others shall furnish certain lab equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all items as required to make lab equipment complete operating systems. The Contractor shall furnish and install all auxiliary piping, valves, controls, control wiring, conduit, alarms, etc., required. All necessary devices, control wiring, conduit, etc., will not necessarily be shown on the drawings.

15017-00 23 00 00 - 16

3.12 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor’s responsibility shall include receiving and installing all Owner furnished equipment.


15017-00 23 05 12 - 1

SECTION 23 05 12 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Refer to Section 26 05 10 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.

B. Refer to Section 22 00 00 - General Requirements for Plumbing Work.

C. Refer to Section 23 00 00 - General Requirements for Mechanical Work.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the coordination between the Fire Protection, Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical portions of the work.

B. This Section is included under the Division 26 portion of the Specifications as Section 26 05 12.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. This schedule may include equipment and systems that are not required for this project. Only the equipment and systems that are required on the drawings and/or specified elsewhere will be required by this section:

ITEM FURNISHED

UNDER DIVISION

INSTALLED UNDER

DIVISION

WIRED AND CONNECTED

UNDER DIVISION

1. Equipment Motors 21/22/23 21/22/23 26 2. Magnetic Motor Starters

a. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA switches

21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5

b. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA switches and furnished as part of factory wired equipment

21/22/23 22/23 Notes 1,3,5

c. Manually controlled 21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5 d. Manually controlled and furnished

as part of factory wired equipment 21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5

e. Furnished in Motor Control Centers

26 26 Notes 1,3,5

3. Variable Speed (Frequency) AC Drives

22/23 26 Notes 1,4,5

4. Line voltage thermostats, time clocks, etc., not connected to control panel systems

23 26 23

5. Electric thermostats, time clocks, remote bulb thermostats, motorized valves, float controls, etc. which are an integral part or directly attached to ducts, pipes, etc.

22/23 22/23 22/23

15017-00 23 05 12 - 2

ITEM FURNISHED UNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLED UNDER

DIVISION

WIRED AND CONNECTED

UNDER DIVISION

6. Temperature control panels and time switches mounted on temperature control panels

23 23 23

7. Motorized valves, motorized dampers, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches, etc.

23 23 Note 1

8. Alarm bells furnished with equipment installed by Division 22 or 23

22/23 22/23 22/23

9. Wiring to obtain power for control circuits, including circuit breaker

21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23

10. Low voltage controls 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23 11. Fire protection system (sprinkler)

controls 21 21 Note 8

12. Fire and smoke detectors installed on mechanical units and in ductwork

28 23 Note 8

13. All relays required for fan shutdown, motorized dampers, smoke control devices, and other items integral with HVAC equipment to provide operation and control of HVAC equipment

23 23 Note 1

14. Smoke dampers, and combination fire/smoke dampers

23 23 Note 7

15. Boiler and water heater controls, boiler burner controls panels

22/23 22/23 22/23

16. Pushbutton stations, pilot lights 22/23 22/23 22/23 17. Heat Tape 21/22/23 21/22/23 26 18. Disconnect switches, manual

operating switches furnished as a part of the equipment

21/22/23 21/22/23 Notes 1,5

19. Disconnect switches, manual operating switches furnished separate from equipment

26 26 26

20. Multispeed switches 23 23 26 21. Thermal overloads 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23 22. Control relays, transformers 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23 23. Refrigeration cycle, cooling tower

and controls 23 23 23

24. Tamper switches for fire protection (sprinkler) system

21 21 28

25. Flow and/or pressure switches for fire protection (sprinkler) system

21 21 28

26. Fire and jockey pump controllers and automatic transfer switch

21 21 Note 6

27. Alarm bells or horns for fire protection (sprinkler) system

21 21 28

28. Generator (underground) fuel tank 22 22 -- 29. Generator fuel level indicator 22 22 26 30. Generator fuel piping from tank to

generator 22 22 --

31. Underground fuel tank leak detection and monitoring system

22 22 22

15017-00 23 05 12 - 3

NOTES: (1) Power wiring as defined in Section 26 29 13 of the specifications shall be provided under Division 26; control wiring as defined in Section 26 29 13 of the specifications shall be provided under Division 21/22/23.

(2) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm systems provided by Division 26, wiring from auxiliary contacts to air handling system controls provided by Division 23. Division 26 shall provide power to smoke detector. Smoke detectors required for all air handling systems 2000 CFM or greater. Refer to other Division 23 specifications, Division 26 and Drawings for more specific requirements.

(3) Disconnect switches, operating switches, starters and other similar items that are factory-mounted, as a part of complete assembly, shall comply with applicable provisions of the National Electric Code. All such disconnect switches shall be fused.

(4) Power wiring from energy source to controllers and automatic transfer switch shall be provided under Division 26. Interconnection power and control wiring from controllers and automatic transfer switch to pumps shall be provided under Division 21, 22 or 23 and conforming to Division 26 specifications. Control wiring from automatic transfer switch to generator starter shall be provided under Division 26.

(5) Division 26 will provide power to all smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers, and Division 28 will provide control for all such dampers using area smoke detectors.

(6) Wiring for sprinkler system controls to be provided by Division 21. Wiring from devices to Fire Alarm System to be provided by Division 28.

B. CONNECTIONS: Make all connections to controls that are directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment with flexible connections.

C. PRECEDENCE

1. In general, piping systems that require a stated grade for proper operation shall have precedence over other systems.

2. Precedence for pipe, conduit and duct systems shall be as follows.

a. Building lines

b. Structural members

c. Soil and drain piping

d. Vent piping

e. Condensate piping

f. Refrigerant piping

g. Electrical bus duct

h. Supply ductwork

i. Return ductwork

j. Exhaust ductwork

15017-00 23 05 12 - 4

k. Chilled water and heating water piping

l. Automatic Fire Protection Sprinkler Piping

m. Natural gas piping

n. Domestic hot and cold water piping

o. Electrical conduit

3. Lighting Fixtures shall have precedence over air grilles and diffusers.

D. FINAL INSPECTION AND REPORT

1. At the completion of the work, there shall be a meeting of the Fire Protection, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical Fire Alarm and Temperature Control Contractors, representatives of mechanical and electrical equipment manufactures whose equipment was actually installed on the project, and similarly-involved individuals, who shall thoroughly inspect all systems, and who shall mutually agree that all equipment has been properly wired and installed, and that all temperature and safety controls are properly functioning. A written report of this meeting, listing those in attendance, and the companies that they represent, shall be filed with the Owner and Architect or Engineer.


15017-00 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93 - MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Adjust and balance Mechanical Water systems

B. Adjust and balance Mechanical Air systems

C. Check each piece of operating equipment provided under Division 23.

D. Provide Balancing Report


A. Independent Subcontractor: All testing, adjusting and balancing shall be performed by a Testing, Adjusting and Balancing firm that is independent from the HVAC systems installer.

B. Balancing Work: Under direct supervision of AABC accredited testing organization certified supervisor.

C. Approved test and balance contractors:

1. Air Balancing Company.

2. No Substitutions.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Balancing Report: At completion of work, submit balancing report in accordance with Section 23 00 00. After adjustments have been made submit three (3) copies of a complete detailed report on mechanical systems and their operation to include:

1. Blackline prints with air openings marked to correspond with data sheets and with thermometer locations clearly marked.

2. Data sheets showing amount of air handled at each opening, instrument used, velocity readings and manufacturer free area factors.

3. Equipment data sheets giving make, size, etc., of fans, motors and drives. Include supply fans, exhaust and recirculating fans.

4. Operating data including fan RPM, measured motor current and voltage BHP and CFM (total).

15017-00 23 05 93 - 2

5. Equipment and operating data including air temperatures entering and leaving coils (maximum air temperature rise), together with corresponding air flow and air pressure drop, water temperatures entering and leaving coils and/or water pressure drop through coil.

6. Prime source refrigeration equipment operating data at design conditions including temperature measurements, flow conditions and corresponding power consumption.

7. A statement outlining any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in above data. Make special note of any discrepancies between tabulated data and specified conditions.


A. Existing Conditions: Verify following conditions before proceeding with work:

1. Installation of the designated system is complete and in full operation.

2. Outside temperature conditions, occupant loads, lighting loads, special equipment requiring extra sensible or ventilation requirements, and solar conditions are within a reasonable range relative to design conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUMENTS

A. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standards and recommendations and requirements of AABC.

B. Calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect preceding work in accordance with Section 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Water Systems: Check:

1. Strainers are clean.

2. Automatic control valves operation.

3. Pump rotation.

4. Other conditions as required.

B. Air Systems: Check:

1. Filters are clean.

15017-00 23 05 93 - 3

2. Filter leakage.

3. Damper operation and leakage.

4. Duct leakage.

5. Fan rotation.

6. Equipment vibration.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. General: Check, adjust and balance air and water system to meet the design performance and tabulate results on acceptable forms. Minimum data to include amperage, voltage input, and thermal heater capacity of each motor, equipment nameplate data and operating speed, pressure drop across each filter bank, pressure rise across each fan and pump, CFM capacity each outlet, zone and fan, and heating or cooling capacity of each coil or element.

B. Belt Drives: Adjust so that when the desired speed and belt tension had been established, the variable speed pulley and the belt tension adjustment shall be at approximately the midpoint of their range.

C. Water Balance and Equipment Test: Include circulating pumps, converters, coils, coolers, chillers, boilers and condensers.

1. Coordinate water chiller flow balancing with chiller equipment manufacturer and design requirements.

2. Adjust flow rates for equipment, coils and evaporator for instance, to values on equipment submittals if different from values on Contract Drawings.

3. Record final measurements for hydronic equipment performance data sheets. Include entering and leaving water temperatures for heating and cooling coils, chiller evaporators and condensers, boilers and for converters. Include entering and leaving air temperatures (DB/WB for cooling coils) for air handling units and reheat coils. Make air and water temperature measurements at the same time.

D. Air Systems:

1. Adjust dampers for the delivery and distribution of air quantities indicated on the drawings.

2. Mark balancing device at final setting.

3. Replacement of adjustable pulleys, installation of additional balancing dampers or pressure taps, required to effect proper air balance shall be furnished and installed by the HVAC Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Adjust exhaust and recirculation air systems for air quantities indicated on drawings and to establish the proper relationship between supply and exhaust.

5. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperature free from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system.

15017-00 23 05 93 - 4

6. Acceptable Tolerances: Adjust fan systems, air devices, etc. as follows:

a. Supply air fan CFM: -5% to +5% of scheduled

b. Return air fan CFM: -5% to +5% of scheduled

c. Exhaust air fan CFM: -0% to +10% of scheduled

d. Supply air device CFM: -0% to +10% of scheduled

e. Return air device CFM: -10% to +0% of scheduled

f. Exhaust air device CFM: -0% to +10% of scheduled

E. Test Run: In order to determine that the system installation is complete and will operate satisfactorily, make a test run with equipment operating per normal temperature control schedule and sequence. Run test and operate and adjust equipment as may be required during test run.

3.4 COMPLETION SERVICES

A. Final Check: Make final checks and do any rebalancing as directed.

B. Report: Submit Balancing Report as specified above.

C. Acceptance: Final acceptance of the project will not be made until a satisfactory report is received. Owner reserves the right to spot check the report by field verification prior to final acceptance.


15017-00 23 73 13 - 1

SECTION 23 73 13 - AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of air handling unit work is indicated on Drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of packaged air handling units specified in this section include the following:

1. Outdoor draw-through with constant volume fan.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and 500.

2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430 "Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on units of certified models.

3. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration", latest edition.

4. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spread rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50; and complying with NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", latest edition.

5. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of air handling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA Standards.

6. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) latest edition as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of air handling units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air handling units showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gauges and finishes of materials, and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop Drawings showing unit dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.

15017-00 23 73 13 - 2

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to air handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data; shop Drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air-handling units with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory fabricated protective containers.

B. Handle air-handling units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install-damaged components; replace and return damaged components to air handling unit manufacturer.

C. Store air-handling units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air handling units, and moving them to final location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air handling units of one of the following:

1. Daikin

2. Temtrol

3. Trane

2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and factory-tested air handling units as indicated, of sizes and capacities as scheduled, and as specified herein.

B. Casings: Construct casings of galvanized steel, maximum L/240 deflection, designed to withstand specific operating pressures. Provide casing panels and/or access doors that are easily and quickly removable for inspection and access to internal parts.

1. Provide single zone units consisting of fan section, coil section, adjustable fan motor mounting, and drain pan.

2. Provide reinforced points of support for either setting or hanging units.

3. Provide stainless steel insulated drain pan, located under cooling coil section extensive enough to catch condensate leaving the coil at highest catalogued face velocity. Provide at least one drain connection at low point in drain pan. Drain

15017-00 23 73 13 - 3

connections shall be located so as to provide and ensure positive condensate drainage – no standing water.

4. Cover casing and frame with manufacturer's standard protective finish on both sides.

C. Coils: Provide heating and cooling coil(s) of scheduled capacity, mounted in unit in manner permitting removal.

1. Construct coils with copper tubing primary surface and aluminum secondary surface bonded to tubes by method approved by specified manufacturer.

2. Provide chilled water and heating coils with threaded connections.

3. Provide chilled water coils with drain and vent connections.

D. Coil Sections: Provide casing for heating and cooling coil(s) as required. Design internal structure of coil section to allow for removal of coil(s), and provide suitable baffles to assure no air bypass around coil(s). Provide condensate pans and drain connections to cooling coil sections of sufficient size to contain and remove coil condensate. Insulate coil section casings and drain pans as specified in "Insulation" paragraph.

E. Fan Sections: Provide type of fans scheduled specifically designed and suitable for class of service indicated. Provide adjustable motor base, adjusted with mounting bolts, to provide variation in center distance. Provide locking nuts, or similar devices, to secure base in proper position. Provide belt-driven fans with adjustable pitch pulley permitting fan speed to be varied. Select pulley for midpoint of adjustable range. Design fan shafts so as not to pass through first critical speed when unit comes up to rated RPM. Provide grease-lubricated fan bearings with externally accessible fittings for lubrication. Statically and dynamically balance fan assemblies in fan housing after final assembly.

F. Filter Boxes: Provide filter boxes with either hinged access doors or quickly removable panels, at each end. Provide racks to receive filters in flat or abhle type pattern.

G. Insulate casing sections with 2 in. thick, 1-1/2 lbs. per cu.ft. density, R6.5 glass fiber insulation. Insulation and adhesive shall conform to NFPA 90A.

H. Provide insulation with fire-retarding characteristics, complying with NFPA 90A. Insulate drain pans as required to prevent condensate formation on unit exterior at ambient conditions to be encountered.

I. Mixing Boxes: Provide mixing boxes of physical size to match basic unit, and include equal-sized-flanged openings capable of handling full airflow. Arrange openings as indicated. Provide dual action parallel or opposed blade dampers with sealing edges. Provide dampers of balanced construction, rotating in centered bronze or nylon bearings.

1. Provide dampers with leakage limited to 0.2% at 1.5 inches static pressure differential.

J. Outdoor Enclosures: Provide weather resistant, outdoor type enclosures for units exposed to weather. Pitch tops of casings for water run-off. Provide gaskets for assembled joints, caulk weather tight.

K. Air Filters: Provide unit with draw through filter section and filter rack. Provide 2" thick, 30% efficient filters accessible from both sides of unit.

L. Premanufactured Roof Curbs (Bid Alternate #1)

15017-00 23 73 13 - 4

1. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard shop fabricated units, modified if necessary to comply with requirements.

2. Fabricate structural framing for units of structural quality sheet steel (ASTM A 570, Grade 40), formed to profiles indicated or, if not indicated, to manufacturer’s standard profiles for coordination with roofing, insulation and deck construction. Include 45o angle cant strips and deck flanges with offsets to accommodate roof insulation. Weld corners and seams to form watertight units.

a. Fabricate units from zinc steel coated steel, ASTM A 446, Grade C, designation G90 hot dip coating, mill phosphatized. Clean and paint with rust inhibitive metal primer paint, of type recommended by manufacturer, 2.0 mils dry film thickness.

3. Reinforce continuous runs of over 3'-0" length, by inserting welded stiffeners of heavy gauge with flanges as required to provide sufficient rigidity and strength to withstand maximum lateral forces in addition to superimposed vertical loads.

4. Sloping Roof Decks: For deck slopes of 1/4" per foot and more, fabricate support units to form level top edge.

5. Gauge and Height: Fabricate units of 14-gauge metal, and nominal height of 14".

6. Provide treated wood nailer, not less than 1 5/8" thick and of width indicated, but not less than width of support wall assembly. Anchor nailer securely to top of metal frame unit.

7. Insulate units inside structural support wall with rigid glass fiber insulation board of approximately 3 lb. density and 1½” minimum thickness, except as otherwise indicated.

M. The Contractor shall for each air handling system with 2000 CFM airflow (nominal 5 Tons) or greater, install UL listed ionization smoke detectors in the main return air duct and/or where shown on the drawings. Smoke detectors furnished by Division 26. Refer to Section 23 05 12. Connect the detectors into the control circuit to stop the fan in the event of the presence of smoke, and smoke fire alarm system.

1. System airflow includes the total airflow of all units serving any space and all units connected to the same return air plenum.

N. Provide manufacturer's combination non-fused disconnect/starter for each unit.

O. Units will be interlocked with existing "Enviromatic" controls system. Mechanical contractor shall hire Enviromatic Systems to provide and install controls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air handling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

15017-00 23 73 13 - 5

3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General: Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof decking, and piping, as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with other work.

C. Access: Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

D. Support: Install roof mounted air-handling units on existing roof curbs (base bid) or provide new roof curbs (bid alternate #1).

E. Mounting: Mount air-handling units on vibration isolators, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

G. Piping Connections: Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges, supports, and flexible connectors as required.

H. Duct Connections: Provide ductwork, accessories, and flexible connections as required.

I. Filters: Install filters prior to operation of air handling units during construction. Maintain filters during construction to prevent units from becoming dirty. Do not operate units at any time without filters installed.

J. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components.


A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start-up and operate equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.4 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air-handling unit. Install new filters at completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.

B. Provide one spare set of belts for each belt driven air-handling unit, obtain receipt from Owner that belts have been received.


15017-00 26 05 10 - 1

SECTION 26 05 10 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, materials, supervision, tools, services, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational systems as specified under this division and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Division.

1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Prior to submitting a bid:

1. Examine the Drawings.

2. Read the Specifications and other Contract Documents, including Addenda and referenced material.

3. Visit the site of the work.

4. Become informed prior to bidding as to existing conditions and limitations of the project.

B. Bring exceptions and inconsistencies in Drawings, specifications, addenda, referenced material, other Contract Documents and site conditions to the attention of the Architect in writing seven days before the bid opening; otherwise be responsible for changes and additions that become necessary during construction.

C. Interpretation or correction of the Contract Documents will be made by Addendum and will be mailed or delivered to each Contract Bidder of Record.

D. Location of material, equipment, devices and appliances shown in the Contract Drawings are approximate and are subject to such revisions as may be necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. Install the work in relation to existing conditions and be responsible for the correctness of the work with reference to finish elevations and surrounding conditions.

E. The Contract Documents show the general arrangements of the work. Should project conditions require any rearrangement, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor may, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of shop drawings of the proposed rearrangement for the Architect's review.

F. If the Contractor proposes to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space affected.

G. The accompanying Drawings do not indicate the existing electrical installations other than to identify modifications and extensions thereto. Visit the site and ascertain the conditions to

15017-00 26 05 10 - 2

be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and installing the new work. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payment in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new or temporary work under this Division.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Execute the work in accordance with local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations having jurisdiction or authority over the work. Make any and all adjustments required by these agencies without further cost to the Owner. In addition, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards:

1. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

6. National Electrical Code (NEC)

7. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)

8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

9. International Building Code (IBC)

10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

12. Applicable utility companies

13. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS)

14. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)

B. Execute the work in accordance with the most current codes and standards in effect at the time of bidding.

C. In the event standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply.

D. Conform to National Electrical Code rules. Provide material and equipment, which is approved by Underwriter's Laboratories, bears UL label and is acceptable to Factory Mutual.

E. It is specifically understood, however, that in those instances where capacities, sizes, etc., of electrical equipment, devices or material as designated in these Specifications or on the Drawings are in excess of the minimum requirements of the National Electrical Code, such designated capacities shall prevail.

15017-00 26 05 10 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings for all material furnished under this division of the work in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – SUBMITTALS.

B. The submittals shall include sufficient descriptive material, such as catalog cuts, diagrams, and other data published by the manufacturer, as well as evidence of compliance with safety and performance standards, to demonstrate conformance to the specification requirements; catalog numbers alone will not be acceptable. The data shall include the name and address of the nearest service and maintenance organization that regularly stocks repair parts.

C. Deliver Shop Drawings to the Architect in sufficient time to avoid delay of the project. Group Division 26 submittals as identified below, submit sections not included in these groupings separately. The Electrical Contractor shall acknowledge receipt of all Division 23 mechanical equipment submittals and confirm the overcurrent protection requirements of the project specific HVAC equipment has been coordinated with the distribution equipment prior to submitting for approval. All proposed changes to the overcurrent protection devices shall be clearly identified in the distribution equipment submittal.

1. Distribution Equipment – Low Voltage

a. Section 26 28 16 – Overcurrent Protective Devices

b. Section 26 28 17 – Disconnect Switches

c. Section 26 29 13 – Motors, Motor Starters & Controls

2. Lighting

a. Section 26 51 13 – Lighting

D. Submit samples for approval when requested by the Architect.

E. Before submitting Shop Drawings for review, examine them and verify that they correctly represent the material or equipment intended for this project. The Contractor's review of Shop Drawings is not intended to take the place of the review of the Architect, and Shop Drawings which have not been reviewed by the Architect shall not be used in fabricating or installing any work.

F. List deviations and exceptions from the specified equipment in writing. Failure to do so will be cause for rejection of submittals. Contractor agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between Shop Drawing submittals and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing submittals are reviewed by the Architect, the Contract Documents shall control and shall be followed, unless deviations have been specifically approved by the Architect.

G. The review of Shop Drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from plans and specifications unless he has, in writing, specifically called attention to such deviations at the time of submission and has obtained the permission of the Architect thereon; nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for error of any kind in Shop Drawings. When the Contractor does call such deviations to the attention of the Architect, he shall state in his letter whether or not such deviations involve any extra

15017-00 26 05 10 - 4

cost. If this is not mentioned, it will be assumed that no extra cost is involved for making the change.

H. Contractor agrees that Shop Drawing submittals reviewed by the Architect are not change orders; that the purpose of Shop Drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use.

2.2 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS

A. It is the intention of these specifications to indicate a standard of quality for all materials incorporated in this work. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are used to designate the item of equipment or material as a means of establishing grade and quality. Where several manufacturers are named, only the named manufacturer's products will be considered and the Contractor's bid shall be based on their product.

B. Where the phrase 'or approved equivalent' or 'or equivalent' or 'equivalent to' or 'accepted substitute' is used in these specifications, the names or name mentioned are to be used as a basis of quality. Other manufacturers will be considered if the quality of the proposed material is equivalent to that of materials named, in the opinion of the Architect. Such unnamed manufacturers' products will, however, is considered as substitutions and shall not be used as a basis for bidding.

C. Basis of quality shall include material, workmanship, weight, finishes, and gauges of material, appearances, capacity and performance. Manufacturer's representation as to availability of equipment, replacement parts and service personnel in the area will be a factor in consideration of submittals.

D. All materials shall be fully warranted.

E. Furnish standard products and manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment.

F. Furnish manufacturer's latest standard design.

G. All equipment shall conform with applicable IEEE, UL, ANSI and/or NEMA Standards.

H. Obtain manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for all installed equipment including installation instructions, preparation cleaning, tests and preservice checks, and then ensure all have been performed prior to completion of work.

2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The Architect prior to installation shall approve substitutions of equipment. Substitution of equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 of the specifications.

B. When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used, the Contractor shall be responsible for space requirements, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, and other apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use.

C. Contractor shall bear all additional costs resulting from the use of substituted materials. Such changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

15017-00 26 05 10 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate and direct the work under this division of the specifications with the work under other divisions of the specifications. Examine the Contract Documents and report any discrepancies between divisions of the work to the Architect and obtain written instructions for changes necessary in the work.

B. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid interferences with the work under other divisions of the specifications. Changes required in the work of the Contractor caused by his neglect to do so shall be made by him at his own expense.

C. Harmonize the work under this division with the work under other divisions of the specifications such that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering, handicapping, or conflicting with the work under other divisions of the specifications. Piping interferences shall be handled by giving precedence to pipelines that require a stated grade for proper operation.

3.2 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Secure and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and inspections required by law for the completion of the Work. Secure and pay for all certificates of approval that are required and deliver them to the Architect before final acceptance of the Work.

B. If a utility company in connection with the work under this division makes any charges, the Contractor shall advise the Owner, so that the Owner can pay these charges. Advise the Owner of these charges in a timely manner, so as not to delay construction of the project.


A. Use adequate quantities of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in their crafts and who are familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed to perform the work in this division.

B. Install materials and equipment based upon actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Field measure for materials or equipment requiring exact fit.

C. Be responsible for the proper location and sizes of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to the work in this division, and for the correct location of pipe sleeves.

D. Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. The good appearance of the finished work shall be of equivalent importance with its operation.

E. Isolate all conduit, transformers and motors to insure an acceptable noise level free from objectionable vibration for all systems.

3.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Follow the manufacturer's directions in the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials.

B. Equipment and materials shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Damaged equipment will not be accepted.

15017-00 26 05 10 - 6

C. After materials are installed, protect the installation until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner.

3.5 CLEANING UP

A. Remove all shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease and stains from all equipment under this division of the Work. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of the Work, clean all electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation in order to present a first class electrical installation suitable for occupancy. No loose parts, scraps, tools nor debris shall be left on the premises.


A. Be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required in connection with the work under this division of the specifications.

B. Coordinate the work to eliminate unnecessary cutting of construction. Where it becomes necessary to cut through walls, floors, ceilings and other construction to permit installation of the work, or to repair defective work under this division, the costs for such cutting and patching shall be included in this division of the work. Comply with other applicable divisions of the specifications concerning the quality of cutting and patching.

C. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Provide adequate support during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the affected masonry.

D. Cutting of structural members is not permitted unless the Architect grants specific written permission.

3.7 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES, INSERTS

A. Be responsible for maintaining the integrity of the waterproofing of conduit penetrations through roofs, exterior walls and floors.

B. Be responsible for the installation of counterflashing of roof penetrations to provide a weatherproof installation.

C. Install 22 gauge galvanized sheet iron sleeves for each conduit passing through floors. Extend sleeves 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab and cement watertight. The sizes of sleeves shall be installed to permit the subsequent insertion of the proper size conduits or raceways.

D. Install galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves around conduits and raceways that pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls. The inside diameter of these sleeves shall be at least 1/2-inch greater than the outside diameters of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed in these sleeves, fill the annular space between pipes and sleeves with mastic. The completed installation shall be watertight.

E. Be responsible for maintaining the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings.

F. Waterproofing and fireproofing work shall conform to the requirements of other applicable sections of the specifications.

15017-00 26 05 10 - 7

3.8 PAINTING

A. Maintain original factory finish on all material and equipment installed under this division of the work unless specifically noted otherwise within the Contract Documents. Should the finish be marred in transit or during installation, it shall be re-finished to present a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment clean and free from any grease, dirt and rust and in a suitable condition for painting.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC, local authorities and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Use laminated three-ply, engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16-inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4-inch high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with chromium-plated screws. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows:

1. Each motor starter - on outside of cover.

C. Custom engraving on cover plates for items noted above shall be equivalent to custom engraving as performed by Hubbell, or accepted substitute.

D. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten, including room numbers. Room numbers and names shall be as finally designated at the jobsite.

E. Refer to other sections of the specifications for conductor color-coding requirements.

3.10 BALANCING OF PANELS

A. At the completion of the installation of the electrical system, check each phase of all panels under full load and arrange loads such that all phases carry the proper proportion of load.

3.11 ACCESS DOORS

A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment installed under this division, provide and install access doors as indicated herein.

B. Furnish and install hinged access door and frame as specified in Section 08 31 13 – ACCESS DOORS.

3.12 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide record documents as specified in Section 01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.

3.13 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Accumulate, as the job progresses, the following data, in duplicate, prepared in a neat brochure or packet folder, and deliver to the Architect for checking and subsequent delivery to the Owner.

15017-00 26 05 10 - 8

1. Manufacturers' warranties, guarantees, service manuals, and operating instructions for equipment and materials covered by this division of the specifications.

2. Copies of approved Shop Drawings.

3. Any and all other data and/or Drawings required during construction.

4. Repair parts list of all major items and equipment including name, address, and telephone number of local supplier and agent.

3.14 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. Provide the services of competent engineers or technicians acceptable to the Architect to instruct representatives of the Owner in the complete and detailed operation of each item of equipment, and each system. These instructions shall be provided for whatever periods may be necessary to accomplish the desired results. Upon completion of these instructions, the Contractor shall obtain a Letter of Release, acknowledged by the Owner or his Authorized Representative, stating the dates on which the various kinds of instruction were given, and the personnel to whom the instructions were given.

B. Be responsible for proper maintenance of equipment and systems until the instructions have been given to the Owner's personnel and the letter of release acknowledged.

C. In providing the instructions to the Owner's personnel, follow the written operating and maintenance manuals in all instances, and familiarize the Owner's personnel with such manuals. Operating and maintenance manuals used for instructions shall include wiring diagrams, manufacturers' operation and maintenance manuals, parts lists (with sources identified), and other data as appropriate for each system, and as required elsewhere in the Specifications to be furnished to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the project.

3.15 LOCAL PARTS AND SERVICE

A. Each item of equipment furnished on this project shall have local representation, factory-authorized service, and an adequate stock of repair parts. "Local" shall be defined, for this purpose, as "within 150 miles of the project site".

3.16 INSTALLATION INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS

A. Obtain timely inspections of the installation by the constituted authorities. Remedy any deficiencies to the satisfaction of the inspection authority.

B. Upon final completion of the Work, obtain certificates of acceptance from the constituted authorities. Deliver the certificates to the Architect for transmission to the Owner.

3.17 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE

A. When any equipment is operable, and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so provided that he properly supervises the operation and retains full responsibility for the equipment operated. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, clean the equipment properly; make required adjustments, and complete punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner.

B. The date of acceptance by the Architect, for beneficial use by the Owner, shall be the beginning date of the warranty period.

15017-00 26 05 10 - 9

3.18 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK

A. The Work, when completed, will be accepted in a finished, perfect and undamaged state only. Provide for protection of the Work during its progress, and if damaged, do all patching or replacing necessary to its full and satisfactory completion.

3.19 WARRANTY

A. Furnish a written certificate, guaranteeing all materials, equipment and labor to be free of all defects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner of the Work, and guarantee that if any defects appear within the stipulated guarantee period, such work shall be replaced without charge.

B. This guarantee shall be extended to include the capacity and integrated performance of all component parts of the various systems.

C. Lamps for light fixtures shall be excluded from the guarantee requirements of this section.

3.20 FINALLY

A. It is the intention that this Specification provide a complete installation. Include all accessory construction and apparatus necessary to the operation and testing of the work under this division. The omission of specific reference to any part of the work necessary for such complete installation shall not relieve this Contractor from furnishing and installing such parts.


15017-00 26 05 11 - 1

SECTION 26 05 11 - WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Refer to Section 26 05 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work.

B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in conjunction with the work in existing buildings as indicated in the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use materials to match existing construction unless specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents. Materials shall comply with local codes, be UL listed, and be properly applied for their intended function.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Inspect the jobsite prior to bidding and be familiar with all existing conditions. Include the cost of the work required to accommodate the existing conditions in the bid proposal.

B. Obtain data related to existing facilities from existing documents, measurements, notations, photographs, surveys and other observations at the site.

C. Relocate existing items as required to accommodate the new construction. Remove, relocate and reconnect equipment and accessories that are to be reused.

D. Coordinate the Work with other divisions of the specifications. Determine which items and equipment are to remain, to be relocated or be removed, and perform all work consistent with the Scope of Work.

E. Loads that exist and are to remain shall be connected to the new distribution system as shown on the Drawings or as required to maintain their proper operation.

F. Refer to other divisions of the specifications and determine equipment that requires power to be disconnected, or power to be relocated and disconnect power and relocate power to this equipment.

G. Remove all conductors and exposed conduit rendered unused back to the source of supply.

H. Perform splices as required to maintain circuit continuity to existing devices or equipment to remain in service.

3.2 DISRUPTION OF EXISTING FUNCTIONS

A. Access: Access to and use of the existing facilities and site will be restricted, and shall be under the direction and control of the Owner.

15017-00 26 05 11 - 2

B. Disruptions: Maintain existing electrical, communications, alarm, and other existing systems, and maintain existing functions in service except for scheduled disruptions. Where existing functions to remain in use are disrupted, they shall be fully restored after disruption, in full compliance with this division of the specifications for new work.

C. Scheduling of Disruptions: Seek and obtain approval two weeks in advance of the event date. Indicate date of event, starting time, and duration of each required disruption.

D. Notice of Disruption: Date, time and duration of each disruption shall be subject to the Owner's prior approval, and shall include the following information in the form of a memorandum submitted by the Contractor to the Architect for approval by the Owner:

STARTING FACILITY/SYSTEM DATE TIME DURATION

E. Emergency Disruptions: When circumstances preclude obtaining advance approval as specified above, make request immediately upon knowledge of the requirement, and perform work so as to cause the minimum amount of disruption, for the minimum duration.

F. Notification: Notify the Architect and the Owner immediately by telephone and then in writing, as changes and additions to the scheduled disruption requirements become known.

G. Duration: Complete as large a portion of the work as possible before initiating disruption and perform only that work necessary so as to minimize duration of disruption. Maintain adequate personnel, supplies, materials, equipment, tools, and other resources at job site to avoid unnecessary delay in resumption of normal service.

3.3 SALVAGE, DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION

A. General

1. Modify, remove, or relocate materials and items indicated in the Contract Documents and required by the installation of new facilities.

2. Working jointly with the work under other divisions of the specifications establish and mark salvage and demolition items before commencing work; report items scheduled for relocation, reinstallation or reuse, which are found to be in damaged condition; await further instructions from the Owner's Representative and/or the Architect before commencing with work.

3. Owner shall have first right of refusal for all material and equipment. Deliver salvaged material accepted by the Owner to destinations on the premises as directed and remove material rejected by the Owner from the site.

B. Relocations

1. Make minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect, without additional cost to the Owner.

2. Repair and restore to good functional condition equipment, materials and items scheduled for relocation, which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations.

15017-00 26 05 11 - 3

3. New materials and items of similar design and quality may be substituted for materials and items indicated to be relocated upon approval of shop drawings, product data, and samples.

4. Remove carefully, in reverse order to original assembly or placement, items that are to be relocated.

5. Protect items until relocation is complete.

6. Clean and repair items to be relocated, and provide new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore items to good operating order.

7. Perform the relocation work in accordance with applicable sections of these specifications, utilizing skilled workers.

C. Relocating Devices: Remove and reinstall, in locations designated by the Owner's Representative and the Architect, temperature control system devices, relays, wire, conduit, fixtures, equipment and other devices required for the operation of the various systems that are installed in existing-to-be-removed construction.

3.4 EXISTING RACEWAYS

A. Reuse raceways where possible and where permitted by local codes. Rework raceways to meet code requirements. Secure all raceways that are not properly supported. Paint raceways when exposed to view to match surroundings if existing finish is damaged or soiled.

B. Fasten existing boxes and raceways securely to provide proper support.

3.5 NEW RACEWAYS

A. Provide new raceways where required to provide wiring as indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Where raceways must be exposed to view, use wiremold, securely fastened, and painted to match surroundings. Provide number of coats of paint as required to cover prime coat of original finish of wiremold.

3.6 EXISTING WIRING DEVICES

A. Inspect existing wiring devices, which are to be reused, for damage and replace as necessary.

B. Clean existing wiring devices, to be reused, to a "like- new" condition.

C. Replace damaged wiring devices cover plates with new cover plates that match the existing.

D. Tighten wire terminations at reused wiring devices.

E. Replace existing lighting switches rated 15 amperes with new switches rated 20 amperes when the load to be controlled exceeds 12 amperes.

15017-00 26 05 11 - 4

F. Replace existing receptacles rated 15 amperes with new receptacles rated 20 amperes when the load to be connected exceeds 12 amperes.

3.7 EXISTING TELEPHONE OUTLETS

A. Inspect existing telephone outlets for damage. Repair or replace damaged outlets.

B. Clean existing telephone outlets.

C. Replace damaged telephone outlet cover plates to match existing.

D. Provide new telephone outlets and conduits to above the ceiling line at locations where existing telephone wiring is not in conduit.

3.8 EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Service existing lighting fixtures as follows:

1. Clean reflective surfaces, lenses, and sight exposed portions.

2. Relamp with new lamps of the same types removed.

3. Repair or replace lamp holders, ballasts, wiring, and door latching and hinging mechanisms.

4. Reconnect to branch circuit wiring, tighten connections.

B. Existing lighting fixtures may be replaced with new fixtures in lieu of the actions required by Paragraph 3.8 A above, if, in the Contractor's opinion, costs to the Owner would be lower.

3.9 EXISTING CEILINGS

A. Provide a typewritten list of existing damaged ceilings and ceiling tiles. Disregard rooms in which ceilings are to be repaired and replaced. Correlate list to room numbers indicated on drawings.

B. Mark damaged ceilings and ceiling tiles with easily removable red "stick-on" labels, minimum size two square in.

C. Submit list prior to commencing work. Do not start work until Architect and Owner review list; otherwise repair and replace damaged ceilings and ceiling tiles.

3.10 EXISTING PANELBOARDS

A. Service existing panelboards to be reused as follows:

1. Clean interiors and exteriors.

2. Touch-up damaged finishes with manufacturer's matching touch-up paint.

3. Inspect for component damage and repair or replace as necessary.

4. Tighten conduit and wire terminations.

15017-00 26 05 11 - 5

5. Verify panelboards and panelboard feeders are of adequate capacity for loads to be served as follows:

a. Activate loads connected to panelboards to simulate 100 percent demand.

b. Measure and record amperage readings of phase and neutral conductors of panelboards feeders.

c. Provide typewritten record of recorded measurements to the Engineer for review.

6. Rebalance loads as specified in other sections of the specifications to provide for evenly balanced phases.

7. Provide new typewritten circuit directories.

8. Provide new panelboard identification labels if panelboard designation changes or if no labels exist.

3.11 EXISTING WIRING

A. Inspect existing wiring to be reused for damage. Repair or replace damaged wiring.

B. Assure integrity of existing wiring insulation as follows:

1. Megger wiring phase-to-phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to ground.

2. Record megger results. Provide typewritten record of results to the Architect for review.

3. Repair defective insulation to a dielectric value equivalent to that of wire of the same type.

4. Existing wiring may be replaced with new wiring if, in the Contractor's opinion, costs to the Owner would be lower.

C. Secure and label existing wiring that is to be disturbed.

D. Tighten existing wiring terminations and connections.


15017-00 26 05 12 - 1

SECTION 26 05 12 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Refer to Section 26 05 10 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.

B. Refer to Section 22 00 00 - General Requirements for Plumbing Work.

C. Refer to Section 23 00 00 - General Requirements for Mechanical Work.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the coordination between the Fire Protection, Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical portions of the work.

B. This Section is included under the Division 22 portion of the Specifications as Section 22 05 12, under the Division 23 portion of the Specifications as Section 23 05 12, and under the Division 26 portion of the Specifications as Section 26 05 12.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. This schedule may include equipment and systems that are not required for this project. Only the equipment and systems that are required on the drawings and/or specified elsewhere will be required by this section:

ITEM FURNISHED

UNDER DIVISION

INSTALLED UNDER

DIVISION

WIRED AND CONNECTED

UNDER DIVISION

1. Equipment Motors 21/22/23 21/22/23 26 2. Magnetic Motor Starters

a. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA switches

21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5

b. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA switches and furnished as part of factory wired equipment

21/22/23 22/23 Notes 1,3,5

c. Manually controlled 21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5 d. Manually controlled and furnished

as part of factory wired equipment 21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5

e. Furnished in Motor Control Centers

26 26 Notes 1,3,5

3. Variable Speed (Frequency) AC Drives

22/23 26 Notes 1,4,5

4. Line voltage thermostats, time clocks, etc., not connected to control panel systems

23 26 23

5. Electric thermostats, time clocks, remote bulb thermostats, motorized valves, float controls, etc. which are an integral part or directly attached to ducts, pipes, etc.

22/23 22/23 22/23

15017-00 26 05 12 - 2

ITEM FURNISHED UNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLED UNDER

DIVISION

WIRED AND CONNECTED

UNDER DIVISION

6. Temperature control panels and time switches mounted on temperature control panels

23 23 23

7. Motorized valves, motorized dampers, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches, etc.

23 23 Note 1

8. Alarm bells furnished with equipment installed by Division 22 or 23

22/23 22/23 22/23

9. Wiring to obtain power for control circuits, including circuit breaker

21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23

10. Low voltage controls 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23 11. Fire protection system (sprinkler)

controls 21 21 Note 8

12. Fire and smoke detectors installed on mechanical units and in ductwork

28 23 Note 8

13. All relays required for fan shutdown, motorized dampers, smoke control devices, and other items integral with HVAC equipment to provide operation and control of HVAC equipment

23 23 Note 1

14. Smoke dampers, and combination fire/smoke dampers

23 23 Note 7

15. Boiler and water heater controls, boiler burner controls panels

22/23 22/23 22/23

16. Pushbutton stations, pilot lights 22/23 22/23 22/23 17. Heat Tape 21/22/23 21/22/23 26 18. Disconnect switches, manual

operating switches furnished as a part of the equipment

21/22/23 21/22/23 Notes 1,5

19. Disconnect switches, manual operating switches furnished separate from equipment

26 26 26

20. Multispeed switches 23 23 26 21. Thermal overloads 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23 22. Control relays, transformers 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23 23. Refrigeration cycle, cooling tower

and controls 23 23 23

24. Tamper switches for fire protection (sprinkler) system

21 21 28

25. Flow and/or pressure switches for fire protection (sprinkler) system

21 21 28

26. Fire and jockey pump controllers and automatic transfer switch

21 21 Note 6

27. Alarm bells or horns for fire protection (sprinkler) system

21 21 28

28. Generator (underground) fuel tank 22 22 -- 29. Generator fuel level indicator 22 22 26 30. Generator fuel piping from tank to

generator 22 22 --

31. Underground fuel tank leak detection and monitoring system

22 22 22

15017-00 26 05 12 - 3

NOTES: (1) Power wiring as defined in Section 26 29 13 of the specifications shall be provided under Division 26; control wiring as defined in Section 26 29 13 of the specifications shall be provided under Division 21/22/23.

(2) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm systems provided by Division 26, wiring from auxiliary contacts to air handling system controls provided by Division 23. Division 26 shall provide power to smoke detector. Smoke detectors required for all air handling systems 2000 CFM or greater. Refer to other Division 23 specifications, Division 26 and Drawings for more specific requirements.

(3) Disconnect switches, operating switches, starters and other similar items that are factory-mounted, as a part of complete assembly, shall comply with applicable provisions of the National Electric Code. All such disconnect switches shall be fused.

(4) Power wiring from energy source to controllers and automatic transfer switch shall be provided under Division 26. Interconnection power and control wiring from controllers and automatic transfer switch to pumps shall be provided under Division 21, 22 or 23 and conforming to Division 26 specifications. Control wiring from automatic transfer switch to generator starter shall be provided under Division 26.

(5) Division 26 will provide power to all smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers, and Division 28 will provide control for all such dampers using area smoke detectors.

(6) Wiring for sprinkler system controls to be provided by Division 21. Wiring from devices to Fire Alarm System to be provided by Division 28.

B. CONNECTIONS: Make all connections to controls that are directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment with flexible connections.

C. PRECEDENCE

1. In general, piping systems that require a stated grade for proper operation shall have precedence over other systems.

2. Precedence for pipe, conduit and duct systems shall be as follows.

a. Building lines

b. Structural members

c. Soil and drain piping

d. Vent piping

e. Condensate piping

f. Refrigerant piping

g. Electrical bus duct

h. Supply ductwork

i. Return ductwork

j. Exhaust ductwork

15017-00 26 05 12 - 4

k. Chilled water and heating water piping

l. Automatic Fire Protection Sprinkler Piping

m. Natural gas piping

n. Domestic hot and cold water piping

o. Electrical conduit

3. Lighting Fixtures shall have precedence over air grilles and diffusers.

D. FINAL INSPECTION AND REPORT

1. At the completion of the work, there shall be a meeting of the Fire Protection, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical Fire Alarm and Temperature Control Contractors, representatives of mechanical and electrical equipment manufactures whose equipment was actually installed on the project, and similarly-involved individuals, who shall thoroughly inspect all systems, and who shall mutually agree that all equipment has been properly wired and installed, and that all temperature and safety controls are properly functioning. A written report of this meeting, listing those in attendance, and the companies that they represent, shall be filed with the Owner and Architect or Engineer.


15017-00 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 - WIRES AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Refer to Section 26 05 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work

B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of wire and cable systems as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications for products to be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide conductors made of soft-drawn-annealed copper with conductivity not less than that of 98 percent pure copper. Conductors #12 gauge and smaller shall be solid. Conductors No. 10 gauge and larger shall be stranded.

B. Utilize conductors with insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type 'THHN' insulation in dry locations and type "THWN" in wet locations. Wire in fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically rated for temperature in Article 300 in the NEC.

C. Minimum wire sizes shall be in accordance with other requirements of the specifications and as follows: For 20 ampere branch circuits #12 gauge, except that home runs greater than 50 ft. from the panel to the first outlet box on 120/208 volt shall be #10 gauge. Where home runs are greater than 100 ft. from the panel to the first outlet box, on 277-volt circuits wire shall be #10 gauge.

D. All wire shall be color-coded. Mark conductors on each end with a 1 in. band of colored pressure-sensitive plastic tape or by the use of brilliant waterproof lacquer, applied according to manufacturers instructions. Colors for each phase and the neutral shall be consistent throughout the system in accordance with the requirements of this section.

E. Conductor sizes shown on the Contract Documents are selected based upon use with 75 degrees C terminations. Furnish terminations, which are UL listed for 75°C, or derate conductors for use at 60°C. Use of 90°C terminations is acceptable, but conductor must be sized at the 75°C rating. Do not use 90°C rating for conductors.

F. Armored cable types AC and BX are specifically not allowed.

G. Armored cable type MC is allowed in walls where required.

H. Armored cable type MC: Galvanized, interlocking steel sheath. 90°C, 600V copper conductors with THHN/THWN insulation. Insulated copper conductor ground wire.

15017-00 26 05 19 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS

A. Place an equivalent number of conductors for each phase, neutral and ground of a circuit in same raceway or cable.

B. Do not share neutral conductors between branch circuits connected to single pole circuit breakers unless shown otherwise on drawings.

C. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.

D. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

E. Make conductor lengths equal for parallel circuits.

F. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling #4 gauge and larger wires.

G. When inserting conductors in raceways, comply with the following:

1. Raceways shall first be installed as a complete raceway system without conductors.

2. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place.

3. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants that have a deleterious effect on the conductors.

4. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.

3.2 PHASING

A. Identify wire and cable for feeders and branch circuits for general power and lighting with a visible color code in accordance with the requirements of this section as follows:

120/208 Volt 277/480 Volt Phase A - Black Phase A - Brown Phase B - Red Phase B - Orange Phase C - Blue Phase C - Yellow Neutral - White Neutral - Gray Ground - Green

B. Provide green or bare grounding conductor identification for grounding conductors. Identification of all ungrounded conductors at junction boxes, wireways, and/or terminations may be by means of colored tape or painting when color-coded conductors as specified above are not available.

C. Phasing of the complete electrical installation shall be connected and maintained the same throughout the power distribution system. Where the project is an addition or modification to an existing facility, the electrical distribution system phasing shall be made the same as the existing.

D. Switchgear, safety switches, motor starters, plug-in type bus duct, lighting and power panels and power receptacles shall have all the same phase arrangements throughout the facility.

15017-00 26 05 19 - 3

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install conductors in a neat and workmanlike manner to meet code requirements and make runs continuous without weld, splice, or joint between boxes. Do not install wires in conduit unless the entire system of conduit and outlet boxes is permanently in place. Pull conductors using a UL approved wire lubricant.

B. Provide conductors continuous from outlet to outlet with no splices except at outlets. Leave sufficient wire at all outlets to make connections without straining.

C. Deliver cable and wire to the project in original packages. Conductors with insulation showing deterioration within one year after final completion and acceptance of the Work shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner.

D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.

F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.

G. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.

H. Where outlets only are indicated, leave 48-in. leads of conductors, for connection to equipment. Identify all conductors’ circuit numbers with Brady tape at terminals and junctions.

I. Where more than three current-carrying conductors are installed in a raceway, use larger size conductor and appropriate larger size raceway to comply with Article 310 of the National Electrical Code.

J. Where conductor is installed in an environment where the ambient temperature will exceed 86°F, use larger size conductor and appropriate larger size raceway to comply with Article 310 of the National Electrical Code.

K. Test all circuits for grounds. Light and test each lamp. Prove and test energy available at the load side of disconnect switches and at the final point of connection to driven equipment. Make all necessary and reasonable tests as required by the Architect to prove the integrity of work and leave the complete electrical installation ready for operation.

L. MC Cable

1. Install MC cable in accordance with NEC, Article 330.

2. Provide fittings UL listed for use with MC cable.


15017-00 26 05 20 - 1

SECTION 26 05 20 - WIRE CONNECTION AND DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of wire connections and devices systems as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Make cable and wire connections for splicing or terminating with compression deforming type connectors as manufactured by Burndy Corp., Thomas & Betts Co., Inc., Dossert Manufacturing Corp., Ilsco Corp., or accepted substitute. Soldered connections will not be permitted. Twist-on insulated connectors, of proper size, and resistant to vibration, may be used. Use twist-on connectors as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co., Thomas & Betts Co., Inc., Ideal Industries, Inc., or approved equivalent.

B. Provide terminal connectors with the hole sizes and spacing in accordance with NEMA standards. Terminal connectors are not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels.

C. Insulate connections made with non-insulated connectors with three layers of plastic tape, each layer being half-lapped. Use No. 35+ plastic tape as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co., or similar and equivalent plastic tape as manufactured by Plymouth Rubber Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Make all electrical power and control connections to equipment furnished under other divisions of the specifications and furnish wiring, conduit, outlet boxes, disconnect switches, etc., as required for same. Check General Construction, Controls, Plumbing, Heating, and Air Conditioning, etc. plans and specifications to determine the amount of such wiring required and include cost of same in bid. Verify locations, horsepower, voltages, etc., of all equipment as the job progresses. If a conflict arises in wiring, ask the Engineer immediately for clarification.

B. Provide branch circuits and connections to all motors furnished to this project. Provide all disconnect switches as shown and where required by national or local codes. In general, all wiring shall be in conduit, with a short section of flexible conduit at each motor. Securely attach conduit to flexible conduit. When the motor is an integral part of equipment, isolate with a short section of flexible metal conduit to prevent vibration and/or noise amplification to

15017-00 26 05 20 - 2

the building structure. If the motor is adjustable, an additional length of flexible metal conduit shall be installed at the motor. Connect a ground wire from the conduit termination to the motor frame on the inside of the flexible conduit. Use approved grounding lugs or clamps on the conduit connection.

C. Branch circuits and connections to all electrically operated equipment are included in this contract, whether or not specifically mentioned. Check, on the job, for further details on Plumbing, Heating, and Air Conditioning equipment as project progresses. Ground equipment in an approved manner.

D. Major equipment furnished under the mechanical and other sections of the specifications may require different rough-in requirements than indicated on the plans due to the 'or equivalent' equipment clause. Secure detailed drawings from the trade furnishing the equipment to determine actual rough-in locations, conduit and conductor requirements.

E. Before connecting equipment, check the nameplate data against the information shown on the Drawings. Call any discrepancies to the attention of the Architect.


15017-00 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of a grounding system as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications for products used.

1.3 TESTS

A. Measure ground grid resistance with earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until resistance to ground complies with Code requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and testing of conduits, fittings, anchors, supports, thermite process materials and equipment, and other materials as required for a complete installation.

B. Provide ground cables composed of stranded bare copper of 98 percent conductivity encased in conduits. Install as required to provide sufficient mechanical protection.

C. Provide Burndy Corp., Type NE, Thomas & Betts Co., Inc., Catalog No. 3951, or approved equivalent, ground fittings for bonding ground cable to its encasing conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250, local codes as specified herein, and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Install ground cables continuous between connections. Splices will not be allowed except where indicated on the Drawings. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, building walls, etc., and are not in metallic enclosures, provide with sleeves of approved nonmetallic material.

C. Use rigid metal conduit and electrical metallic tubing as equipment grounding conductors. Make-up couplings wrench tight. Install grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways and under floor ducts.

D. Install equipment-grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways. Install equipment grounding conductors in metallic raceways where noted on the drawings.

15017-00 26 05 26 - 2

E. Ground interior lighting fixtures with grounding conductor to rigid metal raceways serving them. Flexible metal conduit in lengths less than 6 ft. 0 in. may be used as grounding conductors when terminated with approved fittings on circuits of 20 amperes or less.

F. Where connections are made to motors or equipment with flexible metal conduit, grounding conductor shall be stranded copper conductor within the conduit, bonded to the equipment and to the rigid metal raceway system. Size conductor in accordance with NEC, Article 250.

G. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of No. 12 wire with green colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal of the receptacle. Grounding clip shall be equivalent to Steel City Type G. This requirement may be deleted if automatic grounding clip receptacle meeting NEC Article 250.

3.2 COMMUNICATION GROUNDING

A. Telephone:

1. Provide one No. 4 THW to main service ground bus from each telephone equipment room. Leave 12 in. pigtail at telephone board.

B. Fire Alarm and Detection:

1. Provide one No. 6 THW in 1/2 in. conduit to nearest ground bus.

3.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work under this section with the work under other divisions of the specifications.


15017-00 26 05 27 - 1

SECTION 26 05 27 - SEALING OF PENETRATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with sealing of penetrations as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Provide samples upon written request.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Caulk and Putty: 3M's No. CP-25 and No. CP-303 synthetic elastomers.

2. Wrap/Strip: 3M's No. FS-195 organic/inorganic, fire resistive sheet with aluminum foil on one side.

3. Composite Sheet: 3M's No. CS-195 organic/inorganic fire resistive elastomeric sheet, bonded on one side with 28-gauge galvanized steel and the other side with reinforced hexagonal shaped steel wire mesh and covered with aluminum foil.

4. Thunderline Model "LS/Link-Seal" seals, of the required size and number of links, shall be used on all conduit penetrations of exterior walls. Similar fittings by O.Z./Gedney shall be considered approved equivalents.

2.2 ROOF PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Construct roof penetration systems utilizing the “Alumi-Flash” system by Portals Plus, Inc., or equal by Thy-Curb.

B. Each roof penetration shall include a spun aluminum base (“High” size if required due to the existing roof construction and any insulation thickness) and an EPDM rubber cap. Each rubber cap shall have a pre-molded pipe opening and shall be selected based on the actual pipe or conduit size required at each location. Secure each rubber cap to each pipe or conduit with the manufacturer’s recommended stainless steel gear clamp.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof penetration systems of one of the following:

1. Portals Plus, Inc.

15017-00 26 05 27 - 2

2. Thycurb Div.; Thybar Corp.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Review the detailed requirements of the UL through penetration fire stop assembly to be used and verify dimensional requirements such as maximum conduit size, conduit spacing, maximum opening size, minimum length of sleeve, etc.

B. For sealing of sleeves on or below grade and in wet locations, install link seals around all conduit penetrations properly sealing the annular space between the sleeve and the conduit to provide a waterproof seal.

C. For sealing of sleeves above grade and in dry/damp locations, use specified fire stop material and install per manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with UL requirements.

D. Attach an adhesive warning label identifying the fire stop assembly and warning against removal without proper resealing.

E. Seal floor, wall and ceiling penetrations or fire rated assemblies in above grade and in dry/ damp locations, both horizontal and vertical, utilizing intumescent (expand when heated) materials designed to be applied as a fire, cold smoke, noxious gas, and water sealant. Penetrations shall meet the requirements of ANSI/UL 1479 "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops".


15017-00 26 05 29 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Refer to Section 26 05 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work:

B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with installation of supporting devices as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's engineering brochures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Kindorf

B. Unistrut

C. Superstrut

D. Powerstrut

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Continuous slotted channel: 12 gauge steel with electro-galvanizing and gold zinc dichromate barrier bases and dimensions as required for application.

B. Hanger rods: Continuous thread, electro-galvanized, steel, with gold zinc dichromate barrier, sizes as required for loads imposed.

C. Hex head cap screws and nuts: No. H-113 and No. 114, respectively.

D. One-hole pipe straps: Series HS-100, galvanized steel.

E. Single bolt channel pipe straps: Steel, with machine screw and nut, Series C-105 and Series C-106.

F. Lay-in pipe hanger: Series C-149.

G. Conduit and pipe hanger: Series 6H.

H. Beam clamps: Series 500, RC, EC and PC as applicable.

I. Concrete inserts, spot: Series D-256 or D-255.

15017-00 26 05 29 - 2

J. Concrete inserts, channel: Series D-980 or Series D-986.

K. Riser clamps: Series C-210.

L. Cable supports: O.Z./Gedney Type S.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Carefully lay out supporting devices to coordinate with the work under other divisions of the specifications.

B. Securely fasten and support conduits and raceways to the building structure.

C. Suspend horizontal runs of conduits and raceways from the floor and roof construction by rod hangers spaced 10 ft. or less on centers for sizes 2-1/2 in. and greater, and 9 ft. or less on centers for 2 in. and smaller.

D. Fasten single runs of conduit to the structure with one-hole pipe straps and beam clamps or hang on rod hangers.

E. Support multiple runs of conduit and raceways from continuous channel inserts or from trapeze hangers constructed of rod hangers and channels.

F. Fasten single conduits to rod hangers with adjustable lay-in pipe hangers or for conduits of sizes 2 in. and smaller with Series 6H pipe hangers.

G. Fasten conduits to channels with pipe channel straps.

H. Support conduits and raceways within 3 ft. of each bend, of each termination, and at other intervals to maintain horizontal and vertical alignment without sag and deformation.

I. Do not use cable, strap, or wire hangers and fasteners.

J. Provide riser clamps for conduits at floor lines. Provide wire and cable supports in pull boxes for risers in accordance with NEC.

K. Install supports to permit equivalently distributed expansion and contraction of conduits and raceways with expansion joints. Use guides consisting of saddles, U-bolts and anchors designed for equivalent effectiveness for both longitudinal and transverse thrusts. Submit complete details for review.

L. Do not support conduits and raceways from equipment connections.

M. Provide special supports with vibration dampers to minimize transmission of vibrations and noises, where required.

N. Provide hangers, racks, cable cleats, and supports for wires and cables in cable chambers and other locations to make a neat and substantial installation.

O. Provide steel angle and channel supports to the floor and structure for pull and junction boxes. Provide independent support from entering conduits and raceways.

15017-00 26 05 29 - 3

P. Provide supports as specified for conduits and raceways for outlet boxes and pull boxes 100 cubic in. and smaller.

Q. Paint all cuts, breaks, welds and other points where the rust inhibiting coating of supports is damaged.

R. Provide supports sized for the ultimate loads to be imposed.

S. Anchor supporting devices with:

1. Wood screws on wood.

2. Toggle bolts on hollow masonry.

3. Bolts and expansion anchors in concrete or brick.

4. Machine screws, threaded rods and clamps on steel.

T. Provide supports with hot-dipped galvanized finish in outdoor and wet locations.

U. Pipe and conduit supports:

1. Single run pipe and conduits, 2-1/2 in. O.D. and less, shall have Type SS-8R/SS-8C as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc., or approved equivalent, spaced at maximum eight ft. on center and installed on roof pads if required by the roofing manufacturer.

2. Multiple run pipe and conduits larger than 2-1/2 in. O.D. shall have Type PS, PSE, PP-10 with Roller, or PP-10 with Bar, as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc., or approved equivalent, spaced at maximum eight ft. on center and installed on roof pads if required by the roofing manufacturer. All conduits shall be held in place with clips on bars.


15017-00 26 05 32 - 1

SECTION 26 05 32 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of pull and junction boxes as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pull boxes and junction boxes used on concealed runs of conduit in walls and over ceilings shall be of code gauge galvanized steel with sheet steel covers. Exposed pull boxes or junction boxes installed outdoors shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with watertight gasketed covers fastened with corrosion resistant screws.

B. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes: Metal construction conforming to National Electrical Code, with screw-on or hinged cover. Use hinged cover for boxes larger than 12 in. in any dimension.

C. Flush-Mounted Pull Boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head cover retaining screws, prime coated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control, lighting, computer and communication systems.

B. Install pull boxes and junction boxes where required by the National Electrical Code and wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties.

C. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100 ft. apart when junction or outlet boxes do not break conduit runs.

D. Size pull boxes and junction boxes to best meet the needs of the particular situation and/or location and to comply with the National Electrical Code.

E. Coordinate the work in this section with the work under other divisions of this specification.


15017-00 26 05 33 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 - CONDUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of conduit systems as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and product data for products to be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Rigid Metal Conduit: Heavy-wall, mild steel tube with metallic corrosion-resistant coating on interior and exterior, hot-dipped galvanized, free from defects and manufactured in accordance with ANSI standards, and UL listed.

B. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit:

1. Hot dip galvanized inside and out. Factory-cut threads shall be protected with hot galvanized threads and a clear urethane coating. Thread protectors shall be used on the exposed threads. The PVC coating must have been investigated by UL as providing the primary corrosion protection for the rigid galvanized steel conduit. The PVC coating shall be gray, 40 mils in thickness, continuous over the entire length of the conduit except at the threads, and be free of blisters, bubbles, or pinholes and manufactured in accordance with UL 6 Standard for Safety, Rigid Metal Conduit.

2. The PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit must be certified and authorized to apply the ETL Verification Mark “ETL Verified to PVC-001”. ETL Verified to: Intertek ETL SEMKO High Temperature H20 PVC Coating Adhesion Test Procedure.

C. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): Welded steel tubing formed of low carbon steel, electro-galvanized exterior, inside coated with a thick, baked, tough elastic low-friction coating of enamel, and UL approved.

D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Manufactured in accordance with UL 1242 with interior coating of silicone epoxy ester lubricant.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit: Single strip helically wound interlocking galvanized steel, UL listed; provide liquid tight with extruded polyvinyl jacket in damp and wet locations and in kitchens.

F. Elbows and Bends:

1. Rigid nonmetallic conduit systems - PVC coated rigid metal conduit.

2. Other conduit systems - same material as the conduit with which they are installed.

15017-00 26 05 33 - 2

G. Bushings:

1. 1-1/4 in. and smaller - high-impact thermosetting phenolic insulation, 150°C, O-Z/Gedney Type A.

2. 1-1/2 in. and larger - hot-dipped galvanized with thermosetting phenolic insulation, 150°C, O-Z/Gedney Type B.

H. Locknuts:

1. 1-1/4 in. and smaller - zinc-plated heavy stock steel, O-Z/Gedney.

2. 1-1/2 in. and larger - cadmium-plated malleable iron, O-Z/Gedney.

I. Hubs: Cadmium-plated malleable iron, tapered threads, neoprene 'O' ring, insulated throat, O-Z/Gedney.

J. EMT Connectors: Compression type, zinc-plated steel body, cadmium-plated malleable iron nut, insulated throat, O-Z/Gedney.

K. EMT Couplings: Compression type, zinc-plated steel body, O-Z/Gedney.

L. Liquid tight Conduit Connectors: Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and nut, cadmium plated steel ferrule, insulated throat, integrally-cast external ground lug, O-Z/Gedney Type 4QL.

M. Through-Wall and Floor Seals: Malleable iron body, oversize sleeves, sealing rings, pressure clamps and hex-head cap screws, O-Z/Gedney Type FSK.

N. End Bells: Hot-dipped galvanized, threaded, malleable iron, O-Z/Gedney Type TNS.

O. Expansion Fittings: Hot-dipped galvanized, malleable iron with bonding jumpers.

1. Linear - O-Z/Gedney Type AX or TX.

2. Linear with deflection - O-Z/Gedney Type AXDX.

P. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated sectional floor and ceiling plates, Crane No. 10.

Q. Accessories: Reducers, bushings, washers, etc., shall be cadmium-plated, malleable iron of the forms and dimensions best suited for the application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Size conduits as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as required by the National Electrical Code for the quantity and sizes of wires to be installed in the conduit. Do not use conduit sized less than 1/2 in. unless specified otherwise.

B. No more than one, three-phase circuit or three, single phase circuits may be placed in a single conduit, unless specifically noted on the drawings as such.

15017-00 26 05 33 - 3

C. Conceal conduits from view in all areas except mechanical and electrical rooms and crawl spaces. Should it appear necessary to expose any conduit:

1. Bring it to the attention of the Architect immediately and obtain Architect’s approval for location of exposed conduit.

2. Rearrange the work to facilitate an approved installation.

D. Install conduits at elevations to maintain headroom and at locations to avoid interference with other work requiring grading of piping, the structure, finished ceiling, walls, access panels, etc. Avoid crossing other work.

E. To prevent displacement, securely support conduits to be concealed in the building structure and installed in advance of other work. Carefully lay out conduits installed within the structure, such as floors, beams, and walls to avoid densities excessive for the construction.

F. Ream, remove burrs, and swab inside conduits before pulling in conductors.

G. Cap or plug conduits with standard manufactured accessories as soon as the conduits have been permanently installed in place.

H. Make bends and offsets in 1 in. and smaller conduits with approved bending devices. Do not install conduits, which have had their walls crushed, deformed or their surface finish damaged due to bending.

I. Where space conditions prohibit the use of standard ells, elbows, and conduits, use cast ferrous alloy fittings of such forms and dimensions as best suited for the application.

J. Make conduit joints mechanically tight, electrically continuous, and watertight. Pitch conduits in areas where moisture may subsequently be present in a manner to avoid creating moisture traps; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point.

K. Install insulated throat threaded hubs on conduits entering enclosures without threaded hubs in wet and damp locations.

L. Install and neatly rack exposed conduits parallel with and perpendicular to building walls. Provide space for 25% additional conduit. Do not install exposed diagonal conduit runs.

M. Route and suspend conduits crossing expansion joints to permit expansion, contraction, and deflection utilizing approved fittings to prevent damage to the building, conduits, and supporting devices.

N. Do not install conduits exposed on the roof unless approval is obtained prior to installation.

O. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and duct-work where possible; otherwise, route through roof penetration system as specified in Section 26 05 27 - SEALING OF PENTRATIONS.

P. Do not place conduits in close proximity to equipment, systems and service lines, such as hot water supply and return lines, steam pipes, which could be detrimental to the conduit and its contents. Maintain a minimum of 3 in. separation, except in crossing, which shall be a minimum 1 in.

15017-00 26 05 33 - 4

Q. Connect motors, equipment containing motors, equipment mounted on isolated foundations, and other equipment and devices which are subject to vibration and which require adjustment, with flexible metallic conduit from the device to the conduit serving it. Restrict length of flexible conduit to 6 ft. maximum unless specifically instructed in writing otherwise by the Architect. Provide secure supports at the points of attachment on each side of the connection. Use bonding jumpers as directed by the National Electrical Code and other sections of these specifications.

R. Install escutcheons on sight exposed conduits passing through interior floors, walls, and ceilings in finished spaces

S. Install fire seals on conduits passing through fire-rated partitions, floors and ceiling.

T. Install through-wall seals on conduits passing through exterior walls or use standard galvanized steel pipe sleeves, diameters 1/2 in. greater than the outside diameter of the sleeved conduit and fill the annular space with mastic.

U. Install sleeves for conduits passing through interior floors.

V. Install insulated throat grounding bushings on conduits stubbed through slabs and foundations into electrical enclosures.

W. Provide grounding of conduits, fittings and accessories. Refer to grounding section of specifications.

X. Branch Circuits:

1. Install rigid metal conduit in damp and wet locations, in concrete slabs, and where exposed in crawl space.

2. Install electrical metallic tubing where concealed by building structure and where exposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms.

3. Exterior to the building use rigid steel conduit and for elbows and bends greater than 30 degrees.

4. Install flexible metal conduit where specified above and where permitted by the authorities having jurisdiction. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit in damp and wet locations, where exposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and in kitchen and shop areas. Limit flexible conduit to a length of 6 ft. maximum unless specifically instructed otherwise, in writing, by the Architect.


15017-00 26 05 34 - 1

SECTION 26 05 34 - OUTLET BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of outlet boxes as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 in. male fixture studs where required.

B. Cast Boxes: Cast metal, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs. Use cast boxes for damp and outdoor installation.

C. Provide boxes with plaster ring where required. Boxes for installation in masonry walls shall be special square corner masonry type.

D. Furnish boxes with proper covers and device plates.

E. Cast Metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 6, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as rain tight. Cast metal box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS

A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and code compliance.

B. Determine from dimensions shown on the Contract Documents and by actual measurements on the site, the exact location of each outlet. Outlet locations shall be modified from those shown on the plans to accommodate changes in door swings, space changes or to clear other interferences that arise or from job modifications. Make such modifications at no cost to the Owner as a matter of job coordination. Coordinate job conditions and notify the Architect of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction blocked in place, and secure. Set wall boxes flush with the finish. Install extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to finished surfaces.

15017-00 26 05 34 - 2

C. The locations of equipment and outlets shown on the Contract Documents are approximate. Check and verify exact locations in the field. Coordinate installation with the Architect and with the work under other divisions of the specifications.

D. Unless otherwise noted, location of outlet boxes, measured to centerline of box, shall be as follows:

EQUIPMENT OR OUTLETS ELEVATION (ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR) Toggle Switches 3 feet - 10 inches Fire Alarm Pull Stations 3 feet - 10 inches Receptacles 1 foot - 6 inches Fire Alarm Audible or Audible/Visual

Devices 6 feet - 8 inches to bottom of device

Combination motor starters 5 feet - 0 inches Control stations 3 feet - 10 inches Manual starters 5 feet - 0 inches Thermostats in office 3 feet - 10 inches Telephone/data outlets 1 foot - 6 inches Circuit protective devices 6 feet - 6 inches to top of enclosure

E. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors in accordance with other sections of the specifications.

F. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.

3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide a minimum 6 in. separation in common wall cavity, except provide minimum 24 in. separation in acoustic rated walls. Refer to architectural drawings for locations of acoustic walls.

B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes.

C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.

D. Use multiple-gang boxes where multiple devices are shown to be installed together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems.

E. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.

F. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and back splashes.

G. Position outlets to coordinate luminaire locations with ceilings.

H. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening.

15017-00 26 05 34 - 3

I. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.

J. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices.


15017-00 26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of wiring devices as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications for products to be used. Manufacturer's catalog numbers listed are used to set the standard.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton and Pass & Seymour. All wiring devices for the project shall be of one manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHES

A. Single pole, 15 amp

1. Hubbell HBL1201; Leviton 1201-2; Pass & Seymour PS15AC1

B. Double pole, 15 amp


C. Single pole, 20 amp


D. Double pole, 20 amp


E. Provide 20 amp switches for loads exceeding 10 amps.

F. Use HP rated switches approved for motor control or disconnect service when controlling or disconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP.

2.2 WALL BOX PRESET DIMMERS

A. Provide Leviton “Renoir II” Series dimmers with linear slide and on/off switch or equivalent, sized for 150 percent of the load, unless larger size is indicated. Provide LED, incandescent, fluorescent, or low voltage type dimmer to match the load application shown on the drawings. Provide single-pole or three-way dimmers as indicated on plans. Provide gang dimmers as required in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Provide dimmers with stainless steel plastic coverplate.

15017-00 26 27 26 - 2

2.3 RECEPTACLES

A. Simplex receptacle, 20 amp

1. Hubbell HBL5361; Leviton 5361; Pass & Seymour 5361

B. Duplex receptacle, 20 amp

1. Hubbell HBL5362; Leviton 5362; Pass & Seymour PS5362

C. Ground fault circuit interrupting (GFCI), tamper resistant, type receptacle, equivalent to Hubbell GFR5262SG. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacle for exterior locations. Do not use feed-through feature. Install GFCI device at each location.

D. Use 20-amp receptacle when only one receptacle is on a circuit by itself, or as otherwise noted.

2.4 WIRING DEVICES

A. All wiring devices shall be color as selected by Architect.

2.5 COVERPLATES

A. Interior - Stainless steel equivalent to Leviton type 302/304 Series with cadmium plated screws.

B. Exterior - extra heavy duty, die cast aluminum, weatherproof while-in-use cover equivalent to Hubbell WP26E series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Determine from dimensions shown in the Contract Documents and by actual measurements on the site the exact location of each wiring device. The wiring device locations shall be modified from those shown on the plans to accommodate changes in door swings, space changes or to clear other interferences that arise, or from other job modifications. Make such modifications at no cost to the Owner as a matter of job coordination. Notify the Architect of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from excess building materials, debris, etc.

B. Switches installed at one location shall be ganged together under one coverplate.

3.3 TESTING

A. Test wiring devices to insure electrical continuity of grounding then energize circuit to demonstrate compliance with requirements.


15017-00 26 28 16 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment appliances required in conjunction with installation of overcurrent protective devices as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSES

A. Fuses shall be current-limiting, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting rating and shall be UL listed. All fuses shall be of same manufacturer.

B. Fuses 600 amperes and smaller shall be Class RK1, dual element. These fuses shall have separated overload and short-circuit elements. The overload, time-delay element shall be spring activated and utilize a eutectic alloy with a 284-degree F. melting point. The fuse shall hold 500 percent of its rated fuse current for a minimum of 10 seconds, equivalent to Bussmann dual-element LPN-RK (250 volts or less rating) and LPS-RK (600 volts or less rating).

C. Fuses in motor circuits shall be changed, if necessary, as follows: Fuses for not less than 1.15 service factor motors shall have an ampere rating 125 percent of motor full load current or next higher fuse rating. Fuses for 1.0 service factor motors shall have an ampere rating 115 percent of motor full load current or next higher fuse rating. Use special fusing sizing considerations where motors are subjected to high ambient temperatures, where the motor drives an inertia load causing starting current to be prolonged, where on-off cycles less than 30 minutes, or where special hermetically sealed motors have unusual starting characteristics. When a physically smaller fuse is required in a switch, then the fuse clips must be changed.

D. Ballast controlled light fixtures shall have fuses installed on the line side of the ballast when indicated. The fixture manufacturer shall size fuses, Bussman GLR fuses and HLR fuse holder or equivalent for indoor installation.

2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

1. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.

2. Thermal trip elements shall be factory preset and sealed. Circuit breakers shall be true RMS sensing and thermally responsive to protect circuit conductor(s) in a 40°C ambient temperature.

15017-00 26 28 16 - 2

3. Standard two- and three-pole circuit breakers up to 250 amperes at 600 VAC shall be UL Listed as HACR type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install overcurrent devices in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Coordinate the work under this section with the work under other divisions of the specifications.

B. Fuses shall be installed in all switches as scheduled or noted on the Drawings, and shall be Bussman, Ferraz Shawmut, Littelfuse, Inc., or an approved equivalent.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top of cabinet or enclosure 6 ft. 6 in. above finished floor, properly aligned, and adequately supported independently of the connecting raceways. All steel shapes, etc., necessary for the support of the equipment shall be furnished and installed where the building structure is not suitable for mounting the equipment directly thereon.


15017-00 26 28 17 - 1

SECTION 26 28 17 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with installation of disconnect switches as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Furnish fusible Class 'R' or non-fusible disconnect switches of ampere rating as required, or as indicated on the Drawings. Furnish heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, three-phase, three-pole switches, unless otherwise noted. Use NEMA 1 enclosures where installed indoors. Use NEMA 3R for outdoor enclosures. Provide enclosures with interlocking covers, externally front operated flange mounted switch levers, and provisions for use of three safety padlocks in the 'Off' position. Provide horsepower rated switches for motor circuits. Disconnect switches shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. See Section 26 05 10 General Requirements for Electrical Work paragraph: Identification of Electrical Equipment.

B. Install switches to comply with National Electrical Code and coordinate the work with the work under other divisions of the specifications.


15017-00 26 29 13 - 1

SECTION 26 29 13 - MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with installation of motors, motor starters and controls as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1.3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical wiring for mechanical equipment is separated into two main wiring Divisions: "Power Wiring" and "Control Wiring".

B. Power wiring is wiring and conduit from the primary energy source and includes circuit protective devices, motor starters or controllers, conduit, wiring and safety disconnects beginning at the power supply and terminating at the motor terminals on equipment.

C. Control wiring is wiring and conduit not included in "Power Wiring", including automatic temperature control wiring, interlock wiring, pilot light, signal wiring, etc., that is included for proper operation or safety of the equipment.

D. Provide power wiring under Division 26 of this specification.

E. Control wiring will be provided under Division 23 of this specification.

F. Refer to Section 26 05 12, Mechanical and Electrical Coordination, for directions concerning coordination of the work between Divisions 23 and 26. Coordinate the work under this section with the work under other divisions of the specifications.

G. Install power and control wiring in compliance with National Electrical Code and this Division.

H. Disconnect switches, except where furnished factory mounted, shall be supplied and installed by the Electrical Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified or required, control conductors with a potential of 120 volts or higher shall be a minimum of #14 THWN stranded, and control conductors with a potential of less than 120 volts may be #16 TFFN, unless larger conductors are required to compensate for voltage drop.

B. Install control wiring in a separate conduit raceway system.

15017-00 26 29 13 - 2

C. Color code conductors to coordinate with wiring schematics and diagrams.

D. Other materials shall be as specified in other sections of the specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Note that the electrical design and drawings are based upon equipment furnished under other divisions of the specifications as indicated in the Contract Documents. Should any equipment change dictate changes to the electrical design the required changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Verify the electrical capacities of all motors and electrical equipment furnished by other Divisions and install wiring and equipment as required to completely connect all equipment.

C. Where possible, terminate conduits in conduit boxes on motors. Where motors are not provided with conduit boxes, terminate the conduits in condulet fittings at the motors.

D. Where disconnect switches are not provided integral with the control equipment for motors, provide disconnect switches required by these Specifications and the NEC. Generally, disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, enclosed, externally operable, horsepower-rated switches. Each disconnect switch shall be installed where shown on the Drawings or as close as possible to the motor. Each disconnect switch shall be within sight of its associated controller.

3.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

A. Prior to providing power to equipment, obtain manufacturer's engineering and electrical data.

B. Provide overcurrent protection of equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's maximum recommendations and specifications. Provide HACR circuit breakers and fuses in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and specifications.

C. Install wiring in a separate conduit raceway system in harmony with other raceway systems on the project.

D. Install starters, not furnished within a motor control center on a 3/4 in. thick marine plywood backboard painted to match the surrounding area. Apply a minimum of two coats of paint. Install control and/or accessory devices on the backboard also, in mechanical equipment areas.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Provide electrical connections to each item of equipment requiring such connections.

3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify starters, switches, pushbuttons and other control devices by the attachment of nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic engraved plastic three-ply with black surface and white interior core at least 1/16 in. thick. Engraved lettering shall use an Arial bold font at least 1/4 in. high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with chromium-plated screws. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable.


15017-00 26 51 13 - 1

SECTION 26 51 13 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with the installation of a lighting system as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of fixture and lamp manufacturer's specifications for products used. Identify the total input watts including ballast losses for each fixture type.

B. Submit lighting facts documentation for all LED fixtures.

C. If required by Architect, submit samples of lighting fixtures for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lighting Fixtures: See Schedule in Contract Documents.

2.2 LED FIXTURES

A. Shall be tested for adherence to IESNA LM79 standards for lumen output and depreciation.

B. Shall be tested to IESNA LM80 standards and shall be rated to deliver LM80 performance for 50,000 hours.

C. Shall be DLC (DesignLight Consortium) certified.

D. Shall be equipped with 0-10 volt dimming driver.

E. Shall carry a 5 year all inclusive component warranty for defects.

F. Shall have a 4000K correlated color temperature unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide lighting fixtures as specified and scheduled in the Contract Documents. Provide in accordance with the type designation shown in the Contract Documents. If a type designation is omitted, verify fixture selection with Architect prior to installation.

B. Check the architectural finishes, and provide fixtures with proper trim, frames, supports hangers, and other hardware as required to coordinate with proper finishes, regardless of specified or scheduled catalog number, prefixes and suffixes.

15017-00 26 51 13 - 2

C. Coordinate with Division 23 and other divisions of the specifications to avoid conflicts between lighting fixtures, supports and fittings and mechanical equipment and other work.

D. Fixtures, which are tandem mounted and recessed in gypboard or plaster ceilings shall be yoke mounted.

E. Immediately before final inspection, clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and glassware, adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surface, replace broken or damaged parts. Lamp and test all fixtures for electrical as well as mechanical operation.

F. Provide new lamps delivered to the job in the original packing cases and sleeves.

3.2 UL LISTED CEILING ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide special mounting, enclosures, and fire saving as required by authorities having jurisdiction to maintain integrity of UL listed ceiling assemblies where applicable.
